Home

User Manual - Interlogix

1. Curent Control Panel AL 4617 1 gt Viewan DGP 1 2 3 4 s 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Ras 0009905 l6 8 8 monu a nas ne D Local Bus Layout Parts List ZE Wiring Diagrams Eh Battery Calc Si Cable Cale 6 Setup doors Click to view 4 Door Controller properties E Doors Click to setup Door 1 17 Click to setup Door 2 18 T Door 1 F Door 2 7 Door 3 T Door 4 m nim Remove Door 1 Remove Door 2 dm T Bi Door 3 Remove Door 4 lemove Door we Door JB 3 3 416 p15 _Add Remove Doors x A CH 3 y Selected properties To AL 1256 To AL 1256 8M viu El 4 Door Controller Programming Control panel address EN DGP Addre 1 Clocked relay expanders 0 Alarm code prefix J 1888 an Click to setup Door 4 20 to setup Door 4 20 SEH Poll RAS Not assigned LCD RAS Not assigned RAS RTE zone HN 2 Tonale RAS ES Wat assionedl z Control panel address The control panel this 4 door controller is assigned si m Value 1 Click to setup Door 3 19 Currently viewing 4 Door Controller 1 Control Panels 1 8 Zones 32 256 Relays 11 255 Doors 4 48 Elevators 0 48 34 Software CSS Chapter 2 59 View tabs Add doors to a 4 door controller You can add and remove doors with card readers and keypads to the 4 door controller DGP on the Local bus layout Select a door from the Doors
2. M PE 241 DH 104 uj POCA PO E N EE ES 240 O O TE 65 232 271 A EN E E NE A EE 100 Lut 102 time JONES ecce besides oer aso dna etes 64 65 158 226 233 0 169 programming neseser 64 65 226 233 Ee Een Y 65 99 233 inq EE 102 PIOGTOMMING uice ptite gt e Eo n e Pdl 102 inr M 102 tonedialifip oues erret ter RO HR EE ERR EA 219 371 CUI e MET m 63 185 ZOMG osse ti n Dc cete Pee eR ede Ra 33 65 96 236 246 virtual relay e 65 230 Ic m 237 voice message number 224 Hi 65 238 247 voice reporting etttttttnntttnnnes 217 223 programming Viener tnn 96 el 245 rn 246 W PO coiere erri ti iie venden 34 239 344 EI MR 103 ii A MMC LM RM ii shunt event number 247 EOE STUD tala Hime 103 JUR CHOSE nn prd toan aa 246 wireless DO Picadas 33 132 SEN VENE ELEME programming serial number ease cid vc 81 133 wiring EE 74 82 ideni M 100 Numerics 4 door elevator controller esses 32 59 123
3. Disable No daylight savings time setting required First Sunday Daylight savings time starts ends on the first Sunday of the specified month Second Sunday Daylight savings time starts ends on the second Sunday of the specified month Third Sunday Daylight savings time starts ends on the third Sunday of the specified month Fourth Sunday Daulight savings time starts ends on the fourth Sunday of the specified month Last Sunday Daulight savings time starts ends on the last Sunday of the specified month Chapter 11 209 Diagnostics programming features Next service This option allows you to set a date for programmed text to display on the LCD arming station indicating that the next routine service call is due Programming The following programming options are available for the nest service feature Next service date Specify the date on which the next routine service call is due Next service text Specify the 32 characters of customized text that will be displayed on the LCD arming station for the programmed next service date This option will be used to remind end users when the next routine service call is due and can also be used for those end users who have opted not to have a service maintenance contract The control panel can be armed disarmed or controlled normally by the end user However the programmed service text will continue to appear on the display of the RAS device until the
4. 2 Term This Agreement is effective until terminated s reserved RESPONSIBILITY FOR INACCURACIES OR OMISSIONS AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAI LOSSES OR RISKS PERSONAL OR OTHERWISE INCURRED AS A CONSEQUENCE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT FOR THE LATEST DOCU ER OR VISIT US ONLINE AT WWW GESECURITY COM screen captures and reports used in d itious names of individuals and companies Any similarity to names and addresses coincidental s of General Electric rademarks or registered trademarks of TION grants You a nonexclusive license to use the accompanying he software furnished to You during the term of he Agreement Software and all associated media printed materials and electronic documenta ion accompanying the Software Documentation but only in the country where acquired n this Agreemen S YOUR AGREEMENT TO BE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS DO MEDIATELY CEASE ALL USE OF THE SOFT TLY UNINSTALL ALL COMPONENTS OF THE SOFTWARE he rights granted by this Agreement are business entity o nc a Delaware corporation GE SECURITY This document may not be copied or otherwise reproduced in whole or in part except as specifically permitted under US and international copyright law without the prior written consent from GE Document number revision 1054411A September 2005 FORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOU
5. Door open command Enabled A RAS keypad OUT relay is used to start the shunt timer or a shunt output is used to start the shunt timer The shunt timer resets if the zone does not switch to the active state within Three seconds if the shunt time is programmed for 1 to 127 seconds Three minutes if the shunt time is programmed for 1 to 127 minutes If this option is enabled entry exit shunt must be disabled Disabled The programmed zone state starts the shunt timer Zones holds event Enabled A 2 second delay is applied after the zone switches to the normal state and before it cancels the door event flag and shunt timer Disabled There is no delay Shunt when disarmed Enabled The assigned zone will be shunted when the areas associated with the zone are disarmed Disabled The assigned zone will not be shunted when the areas associated with the zone are disarmed Entry exit shunt Enabled The assigned zone is treated as an entry exit zone A code must be entered to start the shunt timer otherwise an alarm is generated If this option is enabled door open command must be disabled Disabled The assigned zone is not treated as an entru exit zone Shunt when armed Enabled The assigned zone will be shunted when the areas associated with the zone are armed Disabled The assigned zone will not be shunted when the areas associated with the zone are armed Log door open close Enabled The
6. LCD keypad Choose an LCD keypad to the project by selecting the Select an LCD keypad option and using the drop down list The Part description box provides a description of the keypad you select Since all Alliance projects require an LCD keypad if you select the No LCD keypad option you must add a keypad to the system in the System layout tab Click Next Required users Select a memory module from the drop down list A list of attributes is provided for the selected module Use this information to ensure that the selected module meet s your user requirements Click Next PC connectivity options Select the interface option required for your system The Part description box provides a description of the selected option Click Next Completed wizard Click Finish to complete the new project creation and add the project to the project list Chapter 2 View tabs Create from template Click Create from template to create a new project based on the existing project or template that is closest to your application s requirements Template choices are listed in Templates on page 42 The wizard directs you through the steps in Table 4 Table A Create from template wizard Welcome Click Next Specify a project name folder Enter a name for your project that will be used for the project list and specify a project folder where all project files will be stored Click Next Project information Enter the
7. Device collections This option provides the following choices Click for zone collection editor Opens the Onboard zone setup window Use this window to program zones Chapter 1 23 Introduction Click for relay collection editor Opens the Onboard relay setup window Use this window to program relays Click for door collection editor Opens the Intelligent door setup window Use this window to program door options Click to configure control panel macros Opens the Control panel macro collection editor Use this editor to design up to 24 logic equations Click to configure 4 door elevator controller macros Opens the 4 door elevator controller macro collection editor Use this editor to design up to 48 logic equations Click to configure point ID devices Opens the Point ID device configuration window see Add devices to a point ID DGP on page 54 Click to configure wireless devices Opens the Wireless transmitters setup window see Add devices to a wireless DGP on page 53 Memory summary Details limits for things such as alarm groups and door groups 24 Alliance Builder User Manual Creating projects Before you begin a project in Alliance Builder you will need to have some basic information This information includes both a general plan of the required elements of your project and specific company data General project plan To design a project in Alliance Builder you need to have a floor plan with the nu
8. Chapter 3 Alliance Builder tools As built tool The As built tool Figure gathers information from different locations in Alliance Builder and creates a dated report of your project This report can be saved as a PDF file and printed Any or all of the following components can be selected for the report Project summary High level executive summary that includes customer information and tables that list project properties such as zones and doors You can choose to have the information presented in a single properties table or in multiple tables for each category of information CSI specifications Summary of Alliance specifications that are constant for all Alliance systems This summary is approximately 30 pages in length Brochure Add an Alliance brochure to the report System overview diagram Details possible Alliance configurations but is not tied to the devices selected in the project Installer wiring info Choose if you want to add a breakaway relay wiring diagram and or a telephone wiring diagram to the report Bus layouts Provides a graphic representation for the system and local bus layouts as shown in the System bus layout tab and the Local bus layout tabs Device manuals datasheets Provides datasheets for each device type used in the system Select the options you want When you add these options it can significantly increase the size of the As built report Point ID address summary Provides a table with the add
9. Each zone and relay is assigned a unique number These numbers are grouped in blocks of 16 that are tied to a specific device address System bus When mapping a system with DGP devices and expansion modules you must know how many addresses are consumed by each component in the system Systems with an AL 4017 or an AL 4617 control panel can support up to 16 addresses Each address will consume up to 16 zone numbers for a total of up to 256 possible zones Zone numbers 1 through 16 are control panel zones because by default the control panel address is 0 Table 49 shows the 16 system addresses and their related zones Table 49 Addresses and zones Address Zones Appendix D Numbering 0 1 2 5 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 2 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 3 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 4 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 5 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 6 97 98 99 100 101 102 105 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 T 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 8 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 9 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 15
10. RAS card PIN timeout If a user is required to enter a PIN and badge a card in order to gain access this is the maximum time allowed between the two actions If the time elapses the user must repeat the process until the user is locked out To set the access timers do the following 1 Use the up down buttons to set the time for any required access timers 2 Click Close to exit the tool Chapter 4 105 Panel device tools Siren timers The following siren timers are provided External siren time The time for the on board external siren drivers to activate External siren delay time The time that elapses before the external siren cuts off after activation Internal siren time The time for the on board internal siren drivers to activate Internal siren delay time The time that elapses before the internal siren cuts off after activation To set siren timers do the following 1 Use the up down buttons to set the time for any required siren timers 2 Click Close to exit the tool 106 Alliance Builder User Manual Programming validator tool Use the Programming validator tool to search the project for problems with programming options The Programming validator window provides a list of errors found in the system with the error type programming category property property type and number in error This tool is only used to indicate the errors found To correct the errors you must go back to the programming cat
11. This tab shows the following information for wireless devices currently used in your project Type The type of wireless device Part number The part number used to order the device Description A programming description for the device DGP address The DGP system address number for the wireless DGP that controls the device Serial number Each wireless device added to the project requires a unique serial number that is typically listed on the outside of its shipping box The properties shown in the viewer are programmed in the System bus layout tab For information on all wireless device programming options see Wireless DGP on page 132 Arm disarm viewer This tab shows all zones and alarm groups assigned to a selected area programmed for the project When an area is selected in the Area field the area s related zone and alarm group information will display This indicates the zones and areas that users in a specific alarm group can arm and disarm The properties shown in the viewer are programmed in the Control panel programming tab 100 Alliance Builder User Manual Text words tool Use the Text words tool to view the text word library see Text word library on page 308 The library contains up to 900 predefined text words and up to 100 user defined text words The library includes a number and description for each text word A text word can be a single word or a short phrase such as Area Ten with a maximum of 16 characte
12. You can change the value of most device properties However some properties are set automatically for you by Alliance Builder and cannot be changed When a property is selected a gray color indicates the property is read only and can not be changed while a black color indicates a property that can be changed There are several methods provided to change property values The type of programming feature and property value will determine the method used See Property programming on page 18 for information on the following methods of changing properties e Double click menus e Property editor buttons e Arrow buttons e Right click menus Parts list tab Chapter 2 67 View tabs Use the Parts list tab to view edit and print parts lists for your project The tabs at the bottom of the pane provide access to the following three parts lists GE Security parts list Required and optional GE parts Third party parts list Imported non GE parts User defined parts list Text only part information GE Security parts list The GE Security parts list tab Figure provides a list of required and optional GE parts Alliance Builder automatically populates the list with the parts required by the project as shown in the System layout tab GE parts not required by the system layout can be added from the GE parts tree in the left pane Figure 21 GE Security parts list Total GE Security Parts List GE Security parts is a reflection of all
13. Alliance Builder User Manual RAS unlock time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the amount of time a door s RAS device will be unlocked when the door s corresponding event flag has been triggered This time applies to all system doors Testing event flag time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the time the testing event flag is triggered to activate devices in order to perform an arm test The event flag will only be triggered for half the programmed time The remaining time is used to allow the device to switch back to the normal state External siren time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the amount of time for the on board external siren drivers to activate Internal siren time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the amount of time for the on board internal siren drivers to activate AC fail delay time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the delay time before AC fail is reported to the central station Enter the value 0 for no delay Sirens delay time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the time that elapses before sirens cut off after activation Chapter 8 175 Control panel programming features Reporting alarms delay time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the delay time before a burglar alarm BA or BA class tamper alarm TA is reported to the central station It can be used to prevent alarm reporting for users that have problems disarming their area in time After a burglar alarm or input tamper activation there
14. File names path names windows panes tabs fields variables and other GUI elements Titles of books and various documents Blue italic Electronic version Hyperlinks to cross references related topics and URL addresses Monospace Text that displays on the computer screen Programming or coding sequences Safety terms and symbols These terms may appear in this manual A CAUTION Cautions identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to the equipment or other property WARNING Warnings identify conditions or practices that could result in equipment damage or serious personal injury Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides an overview of Alliance Builder In this chapter Alliance Builder User Manual Alliance Builder overview To make designing and programming security systems faster and easier Alliance Builder employs standard Windows drag and drop functionality The application automatically takes care of many of the difficulties normally associated with security design including addressing and numbering devices Use Alliance Builder to Program and label system devices Provide a descriptive name to all system hardware Handle bus addressing Configure doors elevators Apply all system limitation rules during configuration Visualize the system architecture Create a portable project file that details the configured architecture Provide an as built
15. Range 4 to 6 digits enter 0000 if system event reporting is not required Chapter 12 215 Reporting programming features Specify the area account number for a specific system area Area account number 1 handles area 1 area account number 2 handles area 2 etc Do not program more account numbers than there are areas in the system For example a system consisting of only Area 1 and 2 should program the two area account numbers plus the system account number if required For SIA XSIA reporting programming the same area account code for different areas within 1 central station will result in common area reporting the first area with that account code that disarms will send an opening The last to close will send the closing Format Define the central station reporting format 0 Disabled 1 Tecom Dialer V1 only used in Australia 2 Contact ID Small 3 z Contact ID Large 4 SIA Small 5 SIA Large 6 XSIA Small 7 XSIA Large 8 200 baud FSK Format 1 9 200 baud FSK Format 2 10 200 baud FSK Format 3 11 2 200 baud FSK Format 4 12 X25 Enai 13 Voice Reporting Acknowledge 14 Voice Reporting No Acknowledge 18 Securitel Serial 19 Securitel PIN 216 Alliance Builder User Manual Securitel is a direct line format This implies that the panel will not report other programmed CSXs or answer incoming calls to the on board modem unless there s an error Only one central station can be programme
16. See Alarm groups on page 188 DGP offline Flag is raised when a DGP has been programmed to be polled by the control panel but is not responding RAS offline Flag is raised when a RAS device has been programmed to be polled by the control panel but is not responding Duress Flag is raised when a keyboard duress alarm occurs Filmout Flag is raised when the film count for a camera exceeds the programmed Film Out level The film out option is programmed in System options programming Report fail fail to Flag is raised when the control panel fails to report to the central station communicate FTC FTC is initiated after the fourth attempt Test mode Flag is raised when the control panel is in test mode All armed Flag is raised when no areas are disarmed there are no alarm conditions and no entry exit timers running 269 270 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 35 System event flag programming options continued Event flag Description Keypad buzzer When the assigned flag is raised the keypad warning beepers are activated Dialer is off hook active Flag is raised whenever the dialer is off hook Since not all reporting is via PSTN dialer active more accurately represents this event External siren test Flag is raised during the external siren test This event flag could then be used to switch a relay to disconnect the siren auxiliary power for testing All armed pulse Flag is raised when the system is f
17. Alarm restore R156 QR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU 39 24 hour alarms 24 hour 157 ZA Alarm E157 QA low bottled gas level Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB Alarm restore R157 OR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU Table 56 Zone event reporting continued Appendix E Zone event reporting Type number Class Sub class Condition cID SIA 40 24 hour alarms 24 hour 158 ZA Alarm E158 QA low temperature Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB Alarm restore R158 QR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU 41 24 hour alarms 24 hour 159 ZA Alarm E159 QA low temperature Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB Alarm restore R159 QR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU 42 24 hour alarms 24 hour 161 ZA Alarm E161 QA loss of air flow Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB Alarm restore R161 OR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU 341 342 Alliance Builder User Manual Appendix F Zone types This appendix provides a table of zone types 344 Alliance Builder User Manual Zone types Table 57 shows the zone types by number name and description Table 57 Zone types Number and name Description 0 Disabled No alarms are generated by this zone Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 1 Disarmed alarm Generates an alarm when the area is disarmed and reports it to the central station Does not generate
18. In general the control panel will constantly monitor zones for changes in state in order to execute some other action In some cases this will include notifying the central station that an alarm has occurred Zones are assigned to either alarm groups or areas but not both The zone type will determine which is required An alarm group is assigned for zone types 6 31 34 and 35 These zones are typically used for keyswitches to arm and disarm areas The affected areas will come from the assigned alarm group definition All other zone types are assigned areas so that alarm information can be sent to the respective areas and central station Also in assigning areas to zones the alarm can be reset when the alarm occurs In general zones are assigned specific areas in order to dictate which areas will be in alarm when the zone becomes active The control panel uses the zone type to determine how to treat the zone when an assigned area is armed or disarmed The system supports seventy different zone types as shown in Zone types on page 344 and it is important to clearly understand the ramifications in choosing one type over another such as Armed zone types The system will only generate an alarm if the associated area is armed Disarmed zone types The system will only generate an alarm if the associated area is disarmed Chapter 14 237 Zone and relay programming features Entry exit zone types Areas define the entry exit times therefo
19. Keyswitch inhibited 353 Kamahira 384 Kick bar 116 L Landing 118 Loans 127 Lay by 282 Lobby 128 Learning 454 Lock 129 Left 119 Long range 130 Lending 120 Loss prevention 375 Level 121 Lounge 131 Library 122 Low 284 Lift 123 Low level user master 363 Light 124 Low SSO 528 Liquor 125 Lower 132 Loading 126 Lunch 133 Appendix C 315 Text word library M achine 134 Meat 329 Machine store 455 Mechanic 523 agnetic 135 Medical 141 Main 136 Meeting 316 ain admin office 436 Mens 142 Main entry 457 Metal workshop 460 Mains 285 Microwave 143 akash 318 Middle 144 Manager 137 Money 145 anchester 138 Motion 146 Manual 458 Motor 147 aster 139 Multipurpose room 461 aster Advisor 044 Music 462 Mat 140 Music practice 463 aterials store 459 MYCP amp interview 464 N D 313 Noise makers isolated 354 ear 148 North 152 ew 268 North West 153 ext 149 North East 154 ext to 150 Note 155 ight 151 Number 156 ight manager 370 Alliance Builder User Manual O Off 157 Orchestral 466 Office 158 Out 360 Officer 159 Outer 286 On 160 Over 162 Open 161 P Panel 163 Pneumatic 357 Panic 164 Point 171 Park 165 Pool 172 Passage 467 Popup 356 Passive 166 Port 173 Patrol 468 Power 174 Patrol 2 531 Preschool 471 Patrol 3
20. Returns you to the System bus layout tab from the Local bus layout tab or the Control panel programming tab When you select a view tab the left pane interface will activate the tabs used for that view tab and populate with the appropriate information Any left pane tabs that are not active for the selected view tab will be grayed out See the specific view tab topic for information for the left pane interface for that tab Chapter 1 17 Introduction Status bar The status bar Figure 7 located at the bottom of the program window provides a running summary of the total number of various project capabilities for the currently selected control panel and the maximum number allowed in a system Figure 7 Status bar Control Panels 1 8 Zones 16 256 Relays 9 255 Doors 0 48 Elevators 0 48 24 Software C The status bar is provided as a read only feature and the information is automatically generated by Alliance Builder to reflect the present state of the system The following information is included Control panel Number used maximum number allowed Zones Number used maximum number allowed Relays Number used maximum number allowed Doors Number used maximum number allowed Elevators Number used maximum number allowed As devices are added or removed from the system the following colors indicate the state of the project capabilities on the status bar Gray This is the standard state for an attribute Blue The attribute s num
21. Soft time zones 26 to 41 are standard soft time zones RAS function keys Soft time zones 42 to 63 are assigned to specific RAS function keys Programming The following programming options are available for soft time zones Soft time zone number Range 26 to 41 Specify which time zone is being programmed 234 Alliance Builder User Manual Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Output to follow Specify the relay output assigned to the time zone The time zone validity follows the relay state For example the time zone is active when the assigned relay is active and is inactive when the assigned relay is inactive Service technician setup The system provides soft time zone 25 This time zone is hard wired and cannot be programmed It is used in alarm group 9 to grant access to an installer servicing the system The state of the time zone is only active when Service technician menu 17 is enabled Function key programming In order to program the keypad function keys the RAS device address must be between 0 and 4 Also the relay you want to become active when a function key is pressed must have the associated soft time zone programmed Example To activate relay 100 when F1 is pressed on RAS number 1 e Create relay 100 e Based on the table x soft time zone 42 must be used In the time zone option in
22. Switching the zone to its normal state disarms the area This zone type uses an alarm group to perform the arm disarm functions Program the required options in Alarm Group Programming and allocate this alarm group number to the zone Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 32 Armed zone to an event When the area is armed and the zone is activated opened or shorted the flag zone event flag is activated Does not perform any action when the area is disarmed Example Temperature alarm on a freezer that activates an audible warning Disarmed flags none Armed flags zone flag Table 57 Zone types continued Appendix F Zone types Number and name Description 33 24 hour alarm and bypass This zone requires different wiring and can have the following states Shorted Generates an alarm Normal No alarm Active Bypassed no alarm generated Open Tamper alarm Example Keyswitch to bypass a zone designed for shopping centers where only one zone is available for each shop Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 34 Area disarmed alarm group restriction armed A latching keyswitch that has special functions Switching from normal state to active starts the warning time for the alarm group restriction assigned to the alarm group When the warning time expires the area arms Switching from active to normal state disarms
23. The door unlock time doors 1 to 16 is a global setting Setup RAS event flag set RAS EF Event to output Door unlock output triggers on DOOR UNLOCK EF Macro programming acro output Timed 1 to 255 seconds nput flag Timed required time nput 1 EF RAS EF nput 2 Undefined OR nput 3 Undefined OR nput 4 Undefined OR Door unlock Activate EF EF 292 Alliance Builder User Manual Operate door when area is not armed Description Only allow a door to be opened when area is not armed Setup RAS event flag set RAS EF Area Area disarmed EF EF Event to output Door unlock output triggers on DOOR UNLOCK EF Macro programming acro output Timed 1 to 255 seconds Timed required time nput 1 EF RAS EF Area nput 2 EF EF AND nput 3 nput 4 Door unlock Activate EF EF Door unlock EF RAS EF x Area EF Appendix A 293 Boolean logic Use function keys to set an output Description Use the function keys to set an output arm a system using a function key Setup Event to output OPUT setup for activating on time zone 42 or above Alarm group Setup alarm group AGRP for area with alarm system control and arm only Input Input IPUT setup as type 5 using alarm group AGRP Macro programming Macro output Timed 1 to 255 seconds Timed 2 seconds nput 1 O P OPUT
24. Use the Export tool to export a project to an archive file or to software management systems Select your software management system from the drop down menu If a software management system is not supported by Alliance Builder it will be inactive grayed out To export a project to an archive file do the following 1 Select the Export to file tab Figure 24 Figure 24 Export to file Project Export Select the method that best fits how you would like to export the current project You will only gt A GOL ON oa ee lt ins Expottto Fie Export to Aliance Professional Path to file ilder Installers Alliance Installer Alliance Project 8 Alliance Project 8 apf AA Archive password Password protect this archive 2 Use the Browse button to designate the location for the file 3 If you want password protection select Password protect this archive and type a password in the box 4 Click Create archive Chapter 3 91 Alliance Builder tools To export a project to Alliance Professional do the following 1 Select the Export to Alliance Professional tab Figure 25 Figure 25 Export to Alliance Professional Project Export Select the method that best fits how you would like to export the current project You will only s debe LE LOGER usi sic ess UL YS oe n lt installed Export to File Export to Alliance Professional Alliance Professional Login Name ALLIANCE INSTALLER
25. Use the up down buttons to set the time for any required control timers 2 Click Close to exit the tool 104 Alliance Builder User Manual Diagnostic timers The following diagnostic timers are provided Zone test time The maximum time required to perform a test on an individual zone Technician service time The time a technician with service technician privileges has to service the system Disarm test time The time available to do a disarm test Event flag test time The time the testing event flag is triggered to activate devices in order to perform an arm test The event flag will only be triggered for half the programmed time The remaining time is used to allow the device to switch back to the normal state AC fail time The delay time before an AC fail is reported to the central station Arm test time The time available to do a arm test To set diagnostic timers do the following 1 Use the up down buttons to set the time for any required diagnostic timers 2 Click Close to exit the tool RAS access timers The following RAS access timers are provided RAS unlock time The time a door s RAS device will be unlocked when the door s corresponding event flag has been triggered This time applies to all system doors Screensaver timeout The time it takes for the RAS screensaver to time out The screensaver timer will be reset with the programmed time every time a RAS key is pressed when the screensaver is active
26. and user names Alarm group menu options These options dictate which system menus a user may access when using an LCD keypad In order to access the menu the following two conditions must be met The alarm group assigned to the user must have the menu option enabled The alarm group assigned to the LCD keypad must also have the menu option The user does not have to be assigned the same alarm group as the one assigned to the keypad they only have to have the same menu options enabled Table 19 shows the alarm group menu options Table 19 Alarm group menu options Menu number Menu name Description Panel status Provides system information 2 Active zones Shows zones not in the normal state active or tampered 3 Zones in alarm Shows any zones in alarm 4 Bypassed zones Shows any bypassed zones 5 History Lists all events in the control panel event buffer 6 Test report Perform an arm disarm test 7 Service menu Allows the user to request a service call or establish a connection to a remote service center in order to program the system over the telephone network 195 196 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 19 Alarm group menu options continued Menu number Menu name Description 8 Film counters Displays the current frame number position on each of the security camera films 9 List zone names List all known zone names 10 Bypas
27. armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 5 24 hour alarm Generates an alarm regardless of the status of the area Example Tampers panic alarm buttons Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 6 Pulsed keyswitch When the zone switches from normal state to active the functions of the programmed alarm group are performed The arming and disarming operation is dependent on the options programmed in the selected alarm group Disarm only arm and reset only or alarm reset only may be selected Example Keyswitch to arm disarm areas Programming Program the required option in Alarm groups programming Allocate this alarm group number to the zone in Zone programming Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 7 Camera suspicion When this zone is activated cameras in the areas assigned to the zone will be activated When the zone deactivates the cameras continue to operate for the selected suspicion time Example Suspicion button Programming Program the suspicion time in Timers programming Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 345 346 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 57 Zone types continued Number and name Description 8 Disarmed delayed armed Generates an alarm when the area is disarmed but does not report it until general alarm the delayed alarm timer has expired or a second delayed alarm is activated Example Del
28. f you want to copy only part of a topic select the part you want to copy right click the selection and select Copy Words that are links to other topics and step numbers are not copied to the Clipboard Print a topic or book Right click the topic you want to print and select Print Use the Contents tab to print all topics within a book Right click the book and select Print In the Print topics window select the Print the selected heading and all subtopics option and click OK Chapter 1 31 Introduction Alliance system overview The Alliance system combines access control and intrusion in one system that is made up of several different types of devices based around a control panel The system components must be set up and programmed to function together within particular parameters that are determined by the installer Alliance systems can be very simple with very few devices or very large and complex with a wide range of devices Because of this flexibility it is important to understand the basic types of devices how the system must be mapped and how devices are addressed RAS remote arming stations A RAS is a device usually a keypad or card reader that controls arming and disarming of areas within the Alliance system A control panel can have up to 16 RAS devices connected on the system bus When a RAS device is connected to a 4 door elevator controller DGP on a local bus up to four RAS devices are treated as a door by th
29. feature and property value will determine the method used See Property programming on page 18 for information on the following methods of changing properties e Double click menus e Property editor buttons e Arrow buttons e Right click menus Add battery requirements to devices When you select a device on the layout graphic that has a power source the property list will show a battery requirement option Select this option to access the Power distribution window Power distribution window Use this window to assign devices that draw power power sinks to the power source device you are programming Drag the power sink device from the tree at the left and drop it below the power source device in the list on the right To delete a power sink device from the right hand list select the device and click Delete on your keyboard 52 Alliance Builder User Manual In the Power sinks tree e All system bus devices are listed Once a device from the tree has been assigned to a power source device it cannot be assigned to any other power source e Power source devices on the tree will have an by their names They are shown on the tree to indicate the power sink devices assigned to them e All relays for the power source device are shown in angle brackets When programming relays for the internal external siren and strobe the values will be higher since the current draw for these relays is higher e All zones for the power source d
30. none 27 Technical with report When the zone is activated opened or shorted it reports to the central station A restore is sent when the zone returns to its normal state Example Temperature alarm on a freezer Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 28 Armed alarm with autoreset Does not generate an alarm when the area is disarmed Generates an alarm when the area is armed Resets automatically when the zone returns to its normal state Example Latching glassbreak detector Disarmed flags none Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 349 350 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 57 Zone types continued Number and name Description 29 24 hour alarm with Generates an alarm regardless of the status of the area Resets autoreset automatically when the zone returns to its normal state Example Latching glassbreak detector Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 30 Emergency door with Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed but does not report it autoreset to the central station Resets automatically when the zone returns to its normal state Example Emergency door Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 31 Latching keyswitch Used to arm or disarm areas When the zone switches to an active state the areas arm
31. set the following parameters e Card activation Seconds e Minutes e Hours Click Apply to generate the value for Required number of seconds in active Add devices to a wireless DGP After you drag and drop a wireless DGP on the system layout you can add and program wireless devices for the DGP To add devices to a wireless DGP do the following l Either right click the wireless DGP graphic on the system layout and select Device collections Click to configure wireless devices from the drop down menu or double click the graphic Both actions access the same Wireless transmitter setup window 2 Inthe Wireless transmitter setup window depending on the type of device you want right click the Zone sensors 16 total zones or Key FOBs folder on the tree 54 Alliance Builder User Manual Select Add wireless zone transmitter or Add wireless key FOB In the Wireless selection window use the arrow button to access a drop down list of devices and select a device from the list Alliance Builder provides a description for the selected device in the Description field Select a 7 digit serial ID number by clicking View all serial numbers This opens the Wireless serial number window that provides a list of all wireless devices currently in the project Click Close to exit this window and return to the Wireless selection window If you are adding a zone transmitter device specify the number of zones by selecting one of the
32. they will not be printed Print outside of time zone If enabled the printer will only be active outside the specified time zone otherwise the printer is only active during the time zone Chapter 8 Control panel programming features Timers Custom hardware timers can be triggered in the system by various events When an event flag tied to one of the timers is raised the system starts the timer which runs for the specified time When the timer elapses the system generally performs other actions such as arming or disarming an area Timers are system wide meaning other programming features make use of defined timers in order to determine how long a certain feature will be enabled or disabled For example RAS devices will open a door for the time defined in the RAS unlock time option In general if some other programming feature refers to a period of time that is not defined within the scope of that feature the time period will usually be defined in timer programming Note Timersare accurate to 1 the value entered a timer set for 20 seconds will fall between 19 and 21 seconds Therefore avoid using values of 1 second minute Functions Timers can be used for the following functions Timed events Use timers to program how long certain events and system states will be able to run Testing Use timers to set a certain period of time in which the system can be tested without generating alarms System flexibility
33. 1 to 138 Define arm disarm behavior for the door The time zone defines when alarm control can be made Alarm control is governed by alarm group attributes such as the disarm only option in Alarm group programming Alarm Specify the type of alarm control available for the door from the following choices No alarm control Arm disarm is disabled for the reader Alarm control on first badge Areas are disarmed on the first badge if access granted Badging three times will arm the areas Alarm control on third badge Areas are armed disarmed on the third badge if access granted Alarm control with button I F Not supported Alarm always disarm IN arm OUT If access is granted at the IN reader areas defined within the alarm group are disarmed If access is granted at the OUT reader areas defined within the alarm group are armed Authorized RAS Range 0 to 16 these are system bus RAS devices This option supports the ability to provide a user interface to the door controller reader It assumes the specified RAS is an LCD keypad For example when a user badges their card the specified LCD keypad provides alarm control options such as arm disarm The RAS must have toggle area status in RAS programming see RAS options on page 116 enabled in order to function Chapter 7 149 Door programming features IN OUT denied if area armed Prevent a user opening a door using the IN OUT reader when any of the areas assigned to the doo
34. 1 to 32 hours Set the time period for testing the supervision flags of all active sensors Back tamper Enable or disable the back tamper switch on the DGP Serial number Specify the serial number for the sensor The serial number is preset in the wireless sensor during manufacturing and identifies each sensor to the DGP to enable communication between the DGP and the sensor For convenience the serial number is presented in HEX notation with digits 0 to 9 and characters A B C D E and F 134 Alliance Builder User Manual Sensor type Specify the sensor type The sensor type is preset in the wireless sensor during manufacturing and defines the style of sensor being used When programming the sensor type value ensure that the reported sensor type is consistent with the device being programmed Table 8 shows the available sensor types Table 8 Sensor types Type Description 1 Bill trap 2 Smoke detector 3 Panic 4 PIR 5 Recessed door window sensor 6 Thermal detector 7 Carbon monoxide sensor 8 Not assigned 9 Glassbreak shock sensor 10 Door window sensor 11 1 or 2 button panic sensor 12 Fire pull 13 Glass guard 14 Freeze sensor 15 2 or 4 button key fob 16 Not assigned 17 Not assigned 18 Supervised interior siren 19 4 point sensor 20 to 31 Not assigned Chapter 6 135 DGP programming features Sensors that are currently supported by the
35. 3 Click Open You can not have two projects in Alliance Builder with the same project ID If you try to import a project and the project ID already exists in Alliance Builder a warning box will appear See Import export projects on page 28 for more information on importing and exporting projects Alliance Builder User Manual System bus layout tab The System bus layout tab Figure 14 provides an interactive graphical representation of the system Use this tab to design your project and to program the properties for the devices in your project Figure 14 System bus layout tab File Tools Parts Help T qud Tekescreenshot issues 18 AsBui X Architecture View TET Auto Layout B8 Installer Admin Z Device Property Window Export v Show tooltips Programming Viewers Txt TextWords Event Flag Descriptions E Timers Ef Programming Validator Virtual Relays ML DVMAs Cameras Current Control Panel AL 4617 1 gt View All DGP E 3 14 5167 8 9 101112131415 RAS Ob 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16 NENNEN 0 Gen Bes Layout I Pass ist di Wing Diagrams Gh Batey Calo E Cable Cac gt 9 System Devices I BDVMRed0CT S00 x i IB DvMRe 10CT 600A Control Panel DGP 1 IB DVMRe 10CT 1T wei P IB DVMRe 10CT 1TA 1B DVMRe 16CT 600 IB DvMRe 16CT 6004 IB DVMRe 16CT 1T IB DVMRe 16CT 1TA 3 StoreSafe Pro IB SDVR 4P 320 IB spvR 10P 320 IB SDVR
36. 305 306 Alliance Builder User Manual e Card status The current status of the card active disabled void reassigned or lost e Raw card data Shows a special number e Credit issue Adds credits to a user Every user can have credits for up to four different accounts e Card security Set the access level and the locations where the credits can be used Card read sequence The typical card read operation is illustrated in the following steps User 1 facility code 100 card ID 5001 presents their card to a reader The reader sends the card information to the control panel facility code A 100 B 0 not used offset A 5000 B 0 not used The control panel queries the user database manager User 1 record name PIN 12345 user 1 The databases returns the record of the card holder to the control panel and records the access event for User 1 in the event storage manager event buffer event access User 1 The control panel sends an Access Granted message to the reader The reader notifies the user beep LED change RTE that access is granted Appendix C Text word library By default the system provides up to 900 predefined commonly used text words referred to as the text word library You can also define up to 100 additional text words to customize the library to your specific needs The Text words tool on page 100 provides a searchable list of both predefined and user defined text words 308
37. 4 is out of film Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 52 Camera 5 film out Generates an alarm when camera 5 is out of film Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 53 Camera 6 film out Generates an alarm when camera 6 is out of film Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 54 Camera 7 film out Generates an alarm when camera 7 is out of film Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 355 356 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 57 Zone types continued Number and name Description 55 Camera 8 film out Generates an alarm when camera 8 is out of film Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 56 Emergency door if no If time zone 41 is invalid the zone generates a local alarm when the area time zone 41 is disarmed but does not report it to the central station Generates an alarm when the area is armed If time zone 41 is valid the zone is disabled Unless inverted when the output is activated the time zone is valid Example Emergency door Programming Program the local alarm reminder time in Timers programming and link time zone 41 to an output relay in time zone to follow an output Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 57 Technical report and When the zone is activated or tampered it reports to the central station screen and puts the zone event text o
38. 55 21 161 6 41 22 169 7 49 23 177 8 57 24 185 9 65 25 193 10 73 26 201 Ty 81 27 209 12 89 28 217 13 97 29 225 14 105 30 233 15 115 31 241 16 121 32 249 116 Alliance Builder User Manual RAS options Poll RAS Enabled The control panel will continuously poll the RAS device Disabled The control panel will not poll the RAS device LCD keypad Enabled The RAS device has an LCD display Disabled The RAS device does not have an LCD display Toggle area status Enabled Provides the ability to toggle area status via the keypad The user PIN is entered followed by ON OFF or ENTER If a list appears pressing the area number and then ENTER will toggle the area status Enabling this option will cause the ON and OFF keus to lose their default functionality Disabled Normal alarm control functionality This option assumes the RAS device is an LCD keypad Do not use this option if the ENTER key opens door only option is enabled ENTER key opens door only Enabled The ENTER key can be used to open a door Disabled The ENTER key opens a door and provides alarm reset control This option saves the user from having to click the ON OFF keys when performing alarm control It is highly recommended that this option be enabled for the best possible LCD keypad user interface Alarm codes opens door Enabled When a user either badges their card or enters a PIN and has alarm control via alarm group a
39. 9 oues A SAS 139 FUNCIONS sea piri RE RARE RETIA ME beaten ve benda t eds 139 Door access programming cee eee cece Ie 141 Door request to exit RTE programming 146 Door alarm control programming 148 Door reader programming 150 Door hardware programming ccc cece cece eee ence eee mn 154 Door floor groups 25 ANE vena vend dade Er Ye a a RENE EEN E DET 157 FURCHONS M EET 157 Programming SES ebe EE AE abia R 158 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Control panel programming features 159 Control panel 9 VEER id AA A ECC 160 Control panel features aiii cana rr idad dd d ch 161 Memory expansion sssssssssssssssssse mee een 162 Multiple panel systemS cnn rr 163 Gelle Le EE 163 PHANG T 163 O inn EUER DURAN eege Een 164 geleet DEE 165 Macro logie rt xeRerer en ier meadows ian RELEASE EK RR CEU ARES 166 Aliance system macros desse esee rr ep la 166 Printers qc e REL 169 Programi ouo pud n tron ERE RES UET OA BRAND E ERE QUE 169 TIMES scope o Ey e rr AAA a 171 Fictions 3 4 adce orc OD DUE PORE Cade tad 171 Prograimirmiig esse a dde iate hee Ux mer ame iade ene bI 172 Access programming features oooooooooooooo 177 AT isis n e ERDERERERRRGG ROAR DARE Ree TERI ERE EOL ER E ET REPE d 178 FUNCION sr da cos eii 178 Programrmlhg viii is is a Ia 179 Area links programming 0 2 00 ce cence cece II e 184 Bankvaultar as eer pe Ey rre n REESEN NEEN 185 o E ESE EEEE
40. Alliance Builder User Manual Text word library A Above 001 Area nine 340 Access 002 Area ten 341 Accountant 003 Area eleven 342 Accounts 264 Area twelve 343 Accounts manager 417 Area thirteen 344 Across 004 Area fourteen 345 Admin 404 Area fifteen 346 Administration 418 Area sixteen 347 Air conditioning 272 Armored car 410 Alarm 005 Arming 009 All 006 Art 421 All area user code 362 Assistant 265 All ATMs 520 Assistant manager 367 Amenities 419 Assistant manager day 369 Analog 295 Assistant principal 422 Ancillary staff 420 Assoc administrator 423 And 514 At 010 APC 007 ATM 011 Area 008 Atrium 308 Area one 332 Audio 012 Area two 333 Auto 013 Area three 334 Auto arm 350 Area four 335 Auto disarm 351 Appendix C Text word library Area five 336 Automatic 014 Area six 337 Auto reset 381 Area seven 338 AUX 015 Area eight 339 AV production 424 B Back 016 Board 024 Baker 349 Boardroom 025 Baker 1 376 Body 026 Baker 2 377 Boiler 027 Bar 017 Bottom 028 Basement 018 Box 326 Bathroom 019 BRD 539 Battery 273 BRG 267 Bay 020 Building 029 Beam 021 Bulk store 425 Bedroom 022 Business 030 Bell 023 Button 031 309 310 Alliance Builder User Manual C Cabinet 032 Cleaner admin 413 Cage 033 C
41. Alliance wireless DGP are listed in Table 9 Table9 Sensors supported by Alliance wireless DGP ITI stock code Sensor type 60 707 0195R 2 button SAW keychain touchpad 60 670 95R SAW door window sensor 60 741 95 Recessed micro door window sensor 60 639 95R SAW PIR motion sensor 60 873 95 Wireless ShatterPro glassbreak sensor 60 578 10 95 Water resistant pendant panic sensor Wireless devices zone numbering When a wireless device is added to a wireless DGP the device is assigned up to four system zone numbers The number of zones assigned depends on the type of device For example the 4 point sensor should have all four zones assigned Each wireless DGP has from 13 to 32 zones allocated depending on the DGP mode programmed The system zone number assigned to the wireless device is based on both the DGP system address see Numbering on page 324 and the number of zones assigned to the device Example 1 The wireless device is allocated 1 zone and is the first device being programmed The wireless DGP system address is DGP 2 with a zone range of 33 to 48 The associated zone number for the device will be 33 Example 2 The wireless device is allocated 2 zones and is the second device being programmed The wireless DGP system address is DGP 2 with a zone range of 33 to 48 The associated zone numbers for the device will be 34 and 35 Example 3 The wireless device is allocated 1 zone and is the third device bein
42. Chapter 2 63 View tabs Programming features The following programming features are available Alarm control Auto arm disarm This feature allows you to arm disarm programmed areas at specified times For more information see Automatic arm disarm on page 201 Alarm group Alarm groups are assigned to each RAS device in the system and dictate the areas the device has control over the times the alarm group is valid the menus that will be accessible and the functionality that is supported by the RAS device For more information see Alarm groups on page 188 Alarm group restrictions Alarm group restrictions impose limits on the Timed disarmed areas and Areas to arm reset functions for selected areas within an alarm group For more information see Alarm group restrictions on page 197 Auto reset Auto reset allows you to automatically reset alarms after a specified period of time For more information see Automatic reset on page 203 Access Areas Areas define a physical space within a building to establish intrusion protection through zones and to tie those zones to RAS devices through alarm groups For more information see Areas on page 178 Area links Area links tie several areas together to create a common area For more information see Area links programming on page 184 Regions Regions are used in establishing boundaries within 4 door elevator controllers The system allows you to assign regions to both the IN and OU
43. Cloning is used to make an exact copy of an existing system Control panel A control panel is an electronic device that is used to gather all data from zone inputs on the premises Depending on programming and status of areas the control panel generates alarm signals and reports alarms and other events to a central station DGP Data Gathering Panel A device that collects data from other security devices within an area and transfers it to the main control panel or 4 door controller Dialer A dialer is an electronic device that allows the system to transmit alarms and other events to a central station It can also perform up and downloads Disarmed When the security system has been programmed so that normal activity does not set off an alarm the condition of the area or building is referred to as disarmed Door contact A door contact is a magnetic contact used to detect if a door or window is opened Door control Door control is the control over door functions Table 58 Alliance Builder terms explained continued Term Definition Door group A door group assigns a group of doors to a user in order to allow the user access to those doors Access to each door in a group can be restricted via a time zone Download Download is a method to send information to control panels Duress When a user is being forced to breach the security system it is considered a duress situation The system s
44. E EAS 185 REGIONS osse iere u oti Ee AAA Heda Hebe EEEE E 186 FUNCUONS EEUU 186 PROGRAMING en mr phu ure ter pp reet ERANA PER RE Md 186 xi xii Alliance Builder User Manual Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Alarm control programming features 187 Alarm groups vezes res meu e EENE EE eee A A LUCERE T ees 188 Hard coded alarm groups s eoori e 189 FURCHONS ceste e e EROR ene etx uo EE 190 PFOGLOMIMING REPRE 191 Alarm group restrictions 0 cc cece eee ee he hh 197 FUNCIONS RD 198 Programming ETE 198 Automatic arm disarm 6 cece cece cece eee eee meme 201 FURCHONS ETHER 201 rele AP E E E a a a e 201 Automaticreset aio pese bp aid are E EE E 203 PEO iria Rie RU HEFU I sen 203 Diagnostics programming features ssssesssssee 205 Batteryitest oriire eser re tiie ase eae echec epa EE 206 ite te ep le DEER 206 Clock correction ioo rer rte ME ee E EE aA 207 rele te pl e Deb 207 Next service sisse eir be a ETE T POUR ga Rede EUR quoe 209 PFOGKOMIMING ius D UP 209 Test call ere a Steed dene de de See ee 210 cc 210 lee te pp Le DEE 210 Reporting programming features ooooooooo 213 Central Station a geg cts E eR EA 214 lee te tut le DEEN 214 Communication Drogtrommimg 0 cece eect e ete ete teen eee e teenies 217 Reporting Classes zue AN ge Ee ated EA eu ded ieee de Rd e ale sg 221 Programm EEN 221 Voice reporting vs eI Ie E x
45. Hard time zone Upload Upload is a method to receive information from an Alliance control panel User A user is anyone using the Alliance system Users are identified to the system with a unique number that is associated with the user s PIN code Zone input A zone input is an electrical signal to the system from a security device such as a PIR detector or door contact Each device is identified with a zone input number and name Zone shunt A zone shunt procedure prohibits an active zone from generating an alarm during a certain time period Index FaN A E 104 269 delay TINE TC eene 104 E 269 VEDOT CE 219 access D 2 MEM L ET 104 activate Printer a I id 169 Cd AT 94 alarm control v AAA A E AE EEA 148 pi lg m MM 103 alarm CLOUP D 188 239 programming esses 188 191 programming viewer eese 98 alarm group restriction ssssssessesessisrsresestsssreresesee 36 197 PIORTOMMING EE 198 LIMP ii cad 102 TE E 269 PUSE esito neptem tn Pied odes 270 APF archive files cei iii aiii 274 architecture VIEW eec niit TN 84 Lue 178 239 ccolint code siete teri fepe tte tto 214 OLOT ST OUD m M 191 bank Vault uiid oer er oem odas 185 TIRES everest oco n i TP V PEE EE Ete 184 DEOBTAMMINE io ee itt teri ee e Rer Dee 179 programming viewer eese 98 UU C AEN 18
46. OR logic sequences For example a macro might require two event flags to be true active to raise another event flag and cause a specified action Internal external sirens Zone programming supports the ability to raise an event flag that causes the control panel to sound a siren System events Raise an event flag whenever an A C failure takes place In general event flags fall into two categories predefined and custom event flags Predefined event flags Chapter 15 Miscellaneous programming features The system predefines 16 event flags that are primarily used in area programming Table describes these predefined event flags Table 34 Predefined event flags Event flag number Event flag name Description 1 External siren Flag is raised when any external siren activates in any area 2 Armed alarm Flag is raised when a zone generates an alarm and all areas assigned to the zone are armed It is also used to activate the system strobe by default 3 Armed alarm Same as event flag 2 4 Armed alarm Same as event flag 2 5 Armed alarm Same as event flag 2 6 Disarmed alarm Flag is raised when a zone generates an alarm and one or more of the areas assigned to the zone are disarmed 7 Disarmed alarm Same as event flag 6 8 24 hour alarm Flag is raised when any zone generates an alarm 9 Armed alarm Same as event flag 2 10 Armed alarm Same as event flag 2 11 A
47. PIN if time zone Enabled In order to open the door from the OUT reader during the low security time zone only a valid card is required Disabled In order to open the door from the OUT reader during the low security time zone a valid card or a valid PIN is required Two cards IN reader Enabled In order to open the door from the IN reader two different users need to present their card PIN in the 2 card time option in 4 door controller programming see Two ca Disabled In order to open the door needed to present their card PIN rd time on page 126 from the IN reader only 1 user is Two cards OUT reader Enabled In order to open the door from the OUT reader two different users need to present their card PIN in the 2 card time option in 4 door controller programming see Two card time on page 126 Disabled In order to open the door from the OUT reader only 1 user is needed to present their card PIN IN reader bypass region 0 users Enabled In order to open the door from the IN reader the user must already be in a defined region Disabled Users with region 0 will be granted access to the IN reader In most cases region 0 is understood to be off premises OUT reader bypass region 0 users Enabled In order to open the door from the OUT reader the user must already be in a defined region Disabled Users with region 0 will be granted access to the OUT reader In most cases region 0 is
48. Programming 104 E Choose the type of programming you would like to configure by clicking one ofthe buttons The tree to the left will populate with all programmed entries and the property window will fill with the selected tree item properties el Auto Arm Disarm o Allos arming disarming programmed areas at specified times 4 AA Alarm Group Restriction ALA impose limits on the Timed disarmed areas and Areas to sim tesel functions for selected areas within an Alarm Group A Alarm Group Define arm disarm behavior for both devices and users m D 4i bl Min 1 Max 16 Selected Programming Auto Reset Selected properties Program a time in which alarms are auto reset PA f ug mm rug SEN Besch NE zs secas Zerf godes Esport Control Panels 1 8 Zones 32 256 Relays 11 255 Doors 4 48 Elevators 0 48 34 Software J Click a category button to get a list of programming features for that category see Programming features on page 63 then click a programming feature from the list The tree in the Selected programming field will populate with all programming records for that feature Select an item on the tree and the Selected properties field below the tree will fill with the selected item s properties To return to the System bus layout tab select the Return view tab on the left pane
49. Range 8 digits maximum Specify the account code for X25 protocols X25 line type Set the polling time of the line from one of the following options 0 Permanent 15 minutes polling 1 Permanent 90 seconds polling Communication programming Communication programming establishes all system wide central station communication options The settings programmed here are used in conjunction with the central station reporting setup PABX number Range 18 digits maximum A PABX private automatic branch exchange number includes a number that precedes the phone number in order to connect to an outside line This should only be used if the dialer is connected via a PABX to the telephone network In most cases either 9 or 0 is used to access an outside line MSN number Range 17 digits maximum may not contain the characters P and T but only digits between 0 and 9 218 Alliance Builder User Manual Specify the number used for an ISDN dialer The number is sent to the ISDN network when dialing out to the central station This number is also used for remote programming when dialing in Dial tone detection Specify the appropriate dial tone If dial tone detection is not disabled dial tone detection will occur at the beginning of the dialing process after dialing the PABX number or when an asterisk character is identified in the dialed number Dial tone options are shown in Table 23 Table 23 Dial tone options Dial
50. Selected properties field i erede entrer NN od EE DOE PER 66 vii Property programming 5 s vues vor a aia ener 66 Parts list tab coe Hers asin ehh eere bn e cbe e UR Inde ne o a as 67 GE Security parts list oi Teese rre a Ee ele ge E RO ben SNE 67 Add GE PAFS iis ic coe RR RSA iv ds adn nb E Dae ecw PE 68 REMOVE GE POMS EE 69 Third party parts list ew a IEEE bean 69 Import third ele Te TEE 70 Organize the parts Tree 25830 sua glace ere A E Maren 71 Editthird partgipaktsa ssec o Hee i 72 Add third party parts to project 0 0 0 cence nce cece eee 72 Remove third party parts from a project 0 e ccc ence eee eee eee 72 User defined parts list ioi ee rada UE E RUE A 72 Print the e TEEN 73 Wiring diagrams ob 74 VIEWEWIFING CIGGhOMS 35 v Due oe deter IA M Menta NW UPEPFMUDEUME 74 Save wiring diagrams as images iisisssssssssssssssss ee 74 Print Wiring fe e ele EEN 74 Battery calculation tab cece cece eee cence nee nnn 75 Cable Calculation tab on erroe ER eret heh exer exe oe Ce 77 Graph setup IIb i i sei cbe a a pO DIN AE UN RN RD 77 Wire setup tab EE 77 Caleulate cable length EE 77 Print cable calculation 77 viii Alliance Builder User Manual Chapter 3 Alliance Builder tools 1 125 22254 rie 79 Device polling tool 2er rh NN a 80 Enclosures tool 92918 KEES sn ha drain de a add oie RI Ee eg and rare e ERR 80 As builttool 43 EAR emere uh E x uv EHE RR
51. TE ERE EE ETE 81 Page set p Optloris users REERRRORPRRR sey VEN PV DOOR dn Ue PRIN ER MEUS 82 Save the report as a PDF file rusos cece cence e 82 Priritttie PEON misc cen Reno E Ga Mense e ETE DUNS EE DNO IS 83 Print PFEVICW M m 83 Architecture view tool 84 Auto layout tool x erect Rx en E pak eae ARRA EES oo 84 Installer administration tool 85 Dedlei setup tab ima 85 Installer OD eL 85 Add iristallers ocio id Ee 85 installer types tab cinc SEA CE p pen A An 87 Project management tob e 88 Device property window tool 89 Export tool iscctiaieiiiwdindatias IR ELM OO Ee Und Re T DON KD RES 90 Chapter 4 Panel device tools d eat SANTER 93 Device addressing tool 94 Software managedr miode ie eerte tet heer Db SA E epe pao 94 Manually managed mode not available at this time 94 Device address cornfig rdtion c tabes ENEE xad NAAR dee e 94 Programming viewers tool 95 RAS devices VIEW iss ess eror Rd Ree ETT ENER I aa 95 DGP devices VIEWER aie iiien ani Sean Dele LR e x e Lb en PH SEES 95 Giel 96 le EEN 96 Relay control groups viewer 97 Doors VIEWER EE 97 Alarm groups Vie We teva ai 98 ATEOS Mi a tad oi 98 TWME ZONES Ii A a 99 Wireless serial numbers viewer 99 Arm disatm Vi WE A a 99 Textwords oO luminarias ir do aia 100 Event flag descriptions tool 101 TIMERS toON e 102 Alarm group restriction mere 102 Alait
52. The following programming options are available for door hardware Unlock relay Range depends on 4 door elevator controller address and door number Specify the relay that is activated when a user is granted access and the door is unlocked DOTL relay Range depends on 4 door elevator controller address and door number Specify the relay that is activated when the DOTL door open too long zone is active due to the shunt timer expiring Forced relay Range depends on 4 door elevator controller address and door number Specify the relay that is activated when the door contact zone is active without the system having granted access a forced door condition Warning relay Range depends on 4 door elevator controller address and door number Specify the relay that is activated during the warning time when the shunt timer is about to expire For example a separate buzzer might be tied to this relay in order to let the user know that the door needs to be closed Chapter 7 155 Door programming features Fault relay Unsupported at this time RTE zone Range depends on 4 door elevator controller address and door number Specify the zone that activates the RTE request to exit function DOTL zone Range depends on 4 door elevator controller address and door number Specify the zone used to report a DOTL door open too long condition Door contact zone Range depends on 4 door elevator controller address and doo
53. a DOTL door open too long report is sent to both the printer and management software Disabled Depending on zone type no report is generated unless an alarm occurs Time attendance reader Not Supported Chapter 7 153 Door programming features Pulsed lock and unlock output Enabled Special lock strike opening is enabled Two separate relays are pulsed at different times Disabled Normal lock strike opening This option should only be enabled on locks that require two separate relays to be pulsed at different times in order to open and two separate zones for monitoring Disable duress Enabled Duress functionality is disabled for this door Disabled Duress functionality is enabled for this door Map open unlocked to unlocked Enabled When the door is unlocked an unlocked report is sent to both the printer and management software Disabled Unlocking is not reported An unlock condition exists if the door is not closed and is locked 154 Alliance Builder User Manual Door hardware programming All zones and relays used in this section are required to come from on board the 4 door elevator controller Any onboard zones set to zone type 0 Disabled in the zone type option in Zone programming revert to being normal DGP system zones Any zones assigned as door contacts or DOTL door open too long must be assigned a zone type so that the control panel responds to generated alarms
54. added to the text word library Use the Text word tool to view the pre defined library of text words For more information see Text words on page 271 65 66 Alliance Builder User Manual Selected programming field The Selected programming field at the top of the left pane interface contains a tree of all of the selected feature s programmed records For some programming features such as Zones Alliance Builder will populate the tree with all records required by the current project These requirements reflect the devices currently on the system layout Other types of features such as Holidays require you to add the records you need for the system using the Add file icon below the tree Records you add to the tree can also be deleted using the Delete icon Features that rely on Alliance Builder to supply the required records will have the add and delete icons disabled Selected properties field When you select a record in the Selected programming field the Selected properties field below the tree will fill with the programming properties for the selected record The list indicates the property name on the left and the programming value on the right When you select a property name on the list a description of the property appears in the description box below the list as well as the current value programmed for the property Properties that cannot be changed such as the control panel address will be grayed out Property programming
55. alarm that occurs Disabled Reports only one restore for every zone that generates an alarm Engineer reset on system alarms Enabled After a system alarm an engineer reset is required A user cannot arm any areas until an engineer reset is done Disabled Areas can be armed after a system alarm without an engineer reset Engineer reset on system tampers Enabled After a system tamper alarm an engineer reset is required A user cannot arm any areas until an engineer reset is done Disabled Areas can be armed after a system tamper alarm without an engineer reset Arm with no battery Enabled The control panel will arm without a battery attached Disabled the contro panel will not arm if the battery is missing User can do engineer reset Enabled A user can do an engineer reset The user has to give the code that is shown on the display to the installer who can then find a reset code Disabled An engineer reset can only be done by using a dedicated zone 65 or through the LCD keypad installer programming menu 262 Alliance Builder User Manual Engineer entry protect Enabled A user can only enter LCD keypad installer programming by opening the box tamper within 120 seconds This displays Open box tamper on the LCD keypad During the 120 seconds or when in the installer menu the box tamper alarm will be disabled When the installer menu is exited the installer has 120 seconds to close t
56. and providing audible siren support to areas that would normally be difficult to cover The Alliance control panel supports up to 15 DGP devices During system operation the control panel will poll the DGP devices to obtain status information Polling can be continuous or event based depending on your system s configuration Despite their similar characteristics control panels are not considered DGP devices For additional information on DGP devices and their programming options see DGP data gathering panels on page 120 DGP addressing DGP addresses are set by using DIP switches on the devices While most DGP devices have addresses that range from 1 to 15 some devices such as the 4 door controller have addresses that range from 1 to 12 When setting the address on the DGP device it is important to understand the Alliance addressing numbering scheme to ensure that the address is set correctly see Numbering on page 324 Before setting the address refer to the specific device s installation instructions 4 door elevator controller DGP The 4 door elevator controllers provide intelligent doors 4 door controllers and intelligent doors floors 4 elevator controllers control for the system through RTE request to exit antipassback DOTL door open too long and access capabilities The controller accommodates up to 4 RAS devices per door The Alliance control panel can support up to 12 controllers for a system maximum of 48 intellig
57. arm the assigned areas by badging their card three consecutive times within a ten second window Disabled Three times badging functionality is disabled This option assumes the RAS device is a card reader Chapter 6 DGP programming features This chapter provides an overview of data gathering panels DGP devices and programming features In this chapter DGP data gathering ponelel 00 cece 4 door elevator controllers 2 2 ees Pun ID IGP I os dens ti cd an e Re o Boe DGP sks ep T eoa ER eA a 120 Alliance Builder User Manual DGP data gathering panels DGP data gathering panels depending on the device type can provide expansion capabilities redundant databases access control zone monitoring and many other features DGP devices connect to the control panel through the RS485 system bus During system operation the control panel will continuously poll the DGP in order to obtain status information There are a maximum of 15 DGP devices allowed per control panel for 4 door elevator controllers the maximum number is 12 By default each DGP device consumes a single DGP address Typically DIP switches are used to assign the address on the device itself However by expanding a DGP device with zone and relay expansion devices a DGP can consume two addresses Under this scenario other devices within the system cannot use the second address see Numbering on page 324 Types Alliance provides th
58. arming and disarming areas assigned to the alarm group Disabled No arming or disarming is allowed Other access control functionality defined within the alarm group is still allowed List of areas Enabled After a user enters a valid PIN code on an LCD keypad all areas assigned to the user are displayed The user can then select which areas to arm disarm from the menu provided Disabled After a user enters a valid PIN code the areas assigned to the user are immediately armed disarmed once the ON and OFF keus are pressed Keyboard duress Enabled Allows a user to activate the duress function This will cause a silent signal to be sent to the central station notifying them that a user has disarmed the system while under threat Disabled Duress function is disabled for this user The Duress type on page 255 must be configured in order for this function to work correctly Reset system alarms Enabled Allows a user to reset latching system alarms such as DGP tamper siren fail and low battery Disabled Reset latching system alarms is disabled for this user Disable automatic unbypass Enabled During system disarm any zones assigned to the alarm group that are in the active state are not automatically bypassed Disabled During system disarm any zones assigned to the alarm group that are in the active state are bypassed The automatic unbypass when area disarmed option in Control panel options see Syste
59. change the password do the following 1 2 3 4 5 Select the Installer administration tool near the top of the application window Select the nstallers tab 1n the Installer administration window Select ALLIANCE INSTALLER in the list of installers and click Edit Change the password and confirm password information in the New edit installer window and click OK Click Close to exit the tool For more information see Installer administration tool on page 85 9 10 Alliance Builder User Manual User interface Alliance Builder has a user interface that is easy to use and follows standard practices The user interface includes menus toolbars view tabs status bars and dialog boxes as shown in Figure 2 Figure 2 Alliance Builder interface File Tools Parts Help T qud Take screenshot e 77 AsBuit Architecture View I Auto Layout Installer Admin w Show tooltips Current Control Panel AL 2017 1 System Devices EME System Bus Devices A aL 1205 E An E aL 1220 Point ID DGP g aL1281 EE Wireless DGP alls AL 1231 RAS EE Keypads IS AL 1109 E am Programming Viewers Txt TestWords Data Gathering Panels E O DGP Zone Expanders Device Property Window Bs Esport Event Flag Descriptions E Timers EP Programming Validator Virtual Relays ML DVMAs Cameras gt View All DGP bt 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 RAS 1 2 3 4 56 7 8
60. delayed disati suse einer tienen eren poeni neon 103 device address eo ue teen trt deer eer 94 A nieres e EETA Sa 80 DOP C 32 120 bypassed event flag eet tenentes 269 Geelen 269 pos m M 129 pollinpzxi ss eerie RR Semet sett programming viewer zone relay expansion RAN 33 4 door controller dee itte terna 123 diagnostic AAA botte ettet ine rene 104 dialer off hook iere nite access programming alarm control iii alarm BIOUD s d a CONTACT ZONG ata Ri A O ARA O E A i r E EERTE ER CUENTA ee extended access fie hardware programming Gg UE intelligent ie ria IN OUT ii ien e cito e RCM Opel COMMGNG corensis iane anaE n EE RETE POSSDOGK programming essee programming viewer pulsed lock dido idos Time ORE eo eise O ENTERA 142 150 152 unlock time 104 141 Gees 157 EES 158 BEE 157 NUDE 158 PTORTOMINING E ais 158 door open too long DOTL 152 154 155 door RAS NUMbering ccoccoconccnononincnnnnnncncanonananano nana cnnananon 139 doubl En ck iacente erre edere eere yen 242 UAL MET A A 216 1 770 qr T quum Nt 216 nuc M A A RAEE 269 Dp m M P 153 ALEA AAA eter rien tees 269 rie 81 108 mergency WOOK cere iren eerie testet eie 347 EPS TES idiotas 245 engineer walk test sss 241 270 CVI Jlag iio osito dore atu a PRA IHE s
61. door unlocked Enabled The door lock will not relock until the door is closed Disabled The door lock will relock regardless of the door being open or Closed after the unlock time expires Unlock time zone after entry Enabled Before the override time zone unlocks the door a user needs to enter the area Disabled Automatic unlock will start at the override time zone s start time Log door open close Enabled When the door contact zone goes active then back to normal a door is opened closed a report is sent to both the printer and management software Disabled Depending on zone type no report is generated unless an alarm occurs Report forced door Enabled When the door is forced open without a valid card PIN a report is sent to both the printer and management software Disabled Depending on zone type no report is generated unless an alarm occurs Hold door unlocked until door opens Enabled When a user is granted access at a door the door relay will stay active until the door contact zone goes from active to normal a door is opened closed Disabled The door relay will perform normally Report door closed and locked Enabled When a door is closed AND locked a report is sent to both the printer and management software Disabled Depending on zone type no report is generated unless an alarm occurs LogDOTL Enabled When the door remains open after the shunt timer expires
62. enclosure but also on electronic and firmware limitations Alliance Builder will not allow you to drop an ancillary device in an enclosure that does not have the proper space for it Chapter 2 49 View tabs Add ancillary devices to the system bus To add an ancillary device to the system bus do the following 1 Select the device in the ancillary device list and drag and drop it onto the system bus 2 Inthe Expander connection window use the Connect this expander to drop down menu to associate this device with a control panel A description of the selected control panel is provided Click OK to close the window 4 Inthe Enclosure selection and recommended default parts window select the enclosure for the device and select any recommended parts to associate with the device 5 Click OK to close the window Remove ancillary devices To remove ancillary devices from the system layout right click the device and select Remove device from the right click menu or left click the device to select it and hit the Delete key on your keyboard Only the ancillary device that is selected will be removed Other devices in the same enclosure will not be affected View device properties All devices in the layout have properties associated with them To display the properties for a device that has been added to the layout left click the device This will open the Properties tab The description box below the properties list provides a brief de
63. ew All Projects System number Project ID Project description H CPD Importer Exporter ATS8100 0 23 2 Alliance Professional must be loaded on your computer If you have not launched Alliance Professional since loading the program type in your name and password and click Launch Alliance Professional Launching the program creates a database that is necessary for the export function 3 Click Begin export 4 Click Close to exit the tool If you want to view a list of projects that have been exported to Alliance Professional click View all projects The exported projects will appear in the Download history field and will include the following information for each project e System number e Project ID e Project description Download export date 92 Alliance Builder User Manual Chapter 4 Panel device tools The bottom two rows of tools in the tool bar are used for programming that will be downloaded to the control panel In this chapter Device addressing 1008 cc eee a Programming viewers tool LOT rro oc icc be pa ee Ciena date i de 100 Event flag descriptions oof 101 SOIT MED Pm 102 Programming validator tool 2 ee 106 Virtual relays tool ci be tremere 107 DVMRs canera tool eese ec pe e m yrs 108 Current control panel tool 109 DGP RAS numbering graphic 110 94 Alliance Builder User Manual Device addressing tool The Device addressing tool allows you to view the device address
64. in this editor See Macro logic on page 166 for more information Zones editor Assign an existing zone from the list Zones are programmed in the Control panel programming tab on page 62 Arrow buttons Chapter 1 21 Introduction When you select some properties an arrow button is shown to the right of the property value Some arrow buttons provide drop down menus with programming choices for that property Figure 9 The description displayed for the property name explains the implications of the programming choices When options require a numeric value the acceptable range and unit are provided to prevent you from entering an invalid value Figure 9 Property arrow menu GH AL 4017 Device Properties x zs EB Description New Control Panel Memory expansion er Software IUM AL 1830 e No memory expansion IUM om 1MB Expander AL 1830 Door Nur 1MB Expander Software IUM AL 1830 8MB IUM Expander AL 1832 Standard Software IUM No expansion Dg E Connection type TPSTN x Memory expansion The memory expander provides more system resources as well as card data exceeding 26 bits Value 1MB Expander So ware IUM AL 1830 Alliance Builder Properties Device Properties Some arrow buttons provide text boxes These are used for property values such as descriptions of zones and other programming features that are not downloaded to the control panel If there is default text in the box you can overwrite the
65. is enabled See Alarm group restrictions on page 197 Disable code for displaying Enabled The PIN code is not displayed when programming a user on the LCD keypad instead the display shows PIN codes can not be viewed Disabled User PIN codes are displayed when programming users on the LCD keypad Disable flashing area LEDs Enabled The area LED on system keypads will not flash when there is an alarm and or tamper alarm in a given area Disabled Keypad area LEDs will flash when there is an alarm and or tamper alarm in a given area Two users for user programming Enabled Two users are required to enter their PIN codes before access is granted to program users This does not apply to the Master user account Disabled Only standard PIN code access is required to program users Display alarms instantly Enabled Alarm details are displayed immediately on LCD arming stations after an alarm has taken place Disabled Alarm details are not displayed immediately on LCD arming stations after an alarm has taken place To view alarms on the LCD arming station you must press ENTER on the key pad twice Siren only after fail to report Enabled Siren event flags are only activated on alarms if the control panel has failed to report to the central station Fail to communicate FTC is registered at the end of the fourth dial attempt The siren activates for the normal siren cutoff time programmed Disabled Sire
66. is only used by the management software Poll DGP Determine if the control panel should poll this DGP device If a DGP is not polled alarms on any zones associated with the DGP are not reported or logged DGP type Specify the type of DGP you are programming see Types on page 120 The options include e Standard DGP 4 Door Controller DGP e 4 Hlevator Controller DGP e Wireless DGP e Point ID DGP Chapter 6 123 DGP programming features 4 door elevator controllers The 4 door controller provides intelligent door control for the system including RTE request to exit antipassback region support DOTL door open too long and various access capabilities The 4 elevator controller is similar to the 4 door controller with the addition of elevator control A maximum of twelve 4 door elevator controllers are allowed per control panel Although they are similar to the control panel the 4 door elevator controllers are programmed as DGPs data gathering panels As such the system requires that you add the controllers as a DGP in DGP programming before you program the 4 door elevator controller programming options The four reader ports located on the controller are by default the IN readers for the door Each of these four doors has one reader port assigned The reader ports have the following assignments e Reader Port 1 Assigned bus address 1 RAS 1 e Reader Port 2 Assigned bus address 2 RAS 2 e Reader Port 3 Ass
67. list on the Add remove doors tab and drag and drop it on the local bus graphic To remove a door from the graphic click the Remove door option for the door number you want to remove Figure 19 Figure 19 Add remove doors Gy Setup doors Doors SCH CT Door 2 f Door 3 FJ Door 4 Ll E Remove Door 1 _Add Remove Doors Reader List Card readers and keypads To add local bus devices to a door use the Readers list tab Select a device from the device tree and drag and drop it in the door graphic The first device on each door must be a card reader because the first device is connected to the reader keypad which is a wired device To view properties for local bus devices click the device graphic The Properties tab will populate with the properties for that device Only the Description property can be changed all other properties are read only You can overwrite the default text for the description property to identify the device for system programming If DIP switches are used on the device to set the device address the graphic in the Device address DIP settings field will indicate how the DIP switches should be set The graphic will be disabled if the device selected does not have DIP switches To remove a local bus device right click the device graphic and select Remove device from the list 60 Alliance Builder User Manual Program DGP properties Although basic DGP programming for the 4 do
68. make programming faster and easier A typical menu is shown in the following example What s this Create assign or view Create and assign a new X Create and assign a new X and view in property window View assigned X in a property window Navigate to this X Reset or unassign Reset to default Unassign the current value In the example shown X is the name of the programming item The specific drop down menu choices are determined by the type of programming feature and property selected The navigation menus will direct you to the programming item you need For example if you have a RAS device and you want to assign event flag descriptions to a door event flag you would e Double click on the door event flag e Select Create and assign a new event flag description and view in property window e Alliance Builder will create a new event flag and a property window will appear with the item loaded e Click on the Description property and rename it e The event flag description in the property list on the tab will change to match the change you made in the property window 20 Alliance Builder User Manual Property editors If you select a property name and there is a three dot button to the right of the property value click the button to access a property editor window The property editor will give you the programming choices for the selected property The programming choices are dynamic and will change depending on your pr
69. not be used by the DGP and will not be available for any other device The dark gray shading in Table 51 indicates the addresses and zones used by the control panel and light gray shading indicates the addresses and zones used by the first DGP The next available address will be address 4 Table 51 Example 2 Address Zones 2 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 5 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 4 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 5 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 6 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 7 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 125 124 125 126 127 128 8 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 9 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 10 161 162 165 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 11 177 178 179 180 181 182 185 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 12 195 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 13 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 14 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 15 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 328 Alliance Builder User Manu
70. nput 2 nput 3 nput 4 Activate Up IPUT 294 Alliance Builder User Manual Provide latch functionality for entry exit loop Description Setup an EF providing latch functionality suitable for detectors in entry exit loop Setup Event to output Latch OPUT triggered by LATCH EF Area Area disarmed EF AREA EF Entry EF EE EF Exit EF EE EF Macro programming Macro output Non Timed Area nput 1 EF EF Not nput 2 EF EF Not AND nput 3 OR nput 4 OR Activate EF LATCH EF Appendix A 295 Boolean logic Activate a buzzer when a zone is active and area is not armed Description Activate a buzzer when a zone is active and the area is disarmed Setup System EF Keypad buzzer triggered by CHIME EF Area Area disarmed EF AREA EF Inputs Zone EF IPUT EF Zone EF when active YES Macro programming Macro output On timed 1 to 255 seconds Time TIMED AREA nput 1 EF EF IPUT nput 2 EF EF AND nput 3 nput 4 Activate EF CHIME EF 296 Alliance Builder User Manual Activate buzzer when zone is active Description Activate a buzzer when a zone is active and the area is disarmed but only out of hours Setup System EF Keypad buzzer triggered by CHIME EF Area Area disarmed EF AREA EF Inputs Zone EF IPUT EF Zone EF when active YES OOH time zone Out of
71. options in the Specify the number of zones for this sensor field The number of zones is a reflection of the device type of the transmitter If you are adding a key FOB device use the Specify FOB button functionality field to specify if the buttons will be user relay or unused If you choose relay click the 3 dot button to access the Relay editor and double click a relay from the list provided to assign it to the key FOB buttons Click OK to close the window and return to the Wireless transmitter setup window Program wireless device properties You can also use the Wireless transmitter setup window to program certain properties for devices you have added to the tree Click on the device in the tree to select it Alliance Builder supplies most of the information shown to the right of the tree You can however type in a description for the device in the Description box When you have finished adding and programming devices click Close to exit the window Add devices to a point ID DGP After you drag and drop a point ID DGP on the system layout you can add and program point ID devices for the DGP To add devices to a point ID DGP do the following Either right click the point ID DGP graphic on the system layout and select Device collections Click to configure point ID devices from the drop down menu or double click the graphic Both actions access the Point ID configuration window Chapter 2 View tabs 2 Inthe Point ID config
72. owner Each card communicates a unique card number Offsets range from 32767 to 32767 and specify the number to be added or subtracted from the actual user card ID number The control panel will determine the user number using the following calculation User number Card ID or card offset Example The card offset is programmed as 5000 The actual physical card ID number is 5001 The card will be programmed as User 1 and will report as User 1 The calculated user number is used for programming the user and reporting events to the central station or control panel A and B are used in conjunction with the respective system code System code A is mapped to offset A and system code B is mapped to offset B Appendix B 303 Card access IUM intelligent user module and memory The hardware memory configuration of the Alliance system will determine the capacity of resources available The largest impact is in consideration to the amount and types of users When designing your system this factor must be taken under consideration The following types of hardware memory configurations can be used in an Alliance system Standard no memory expansion 1 MB expansion software UM Expanded 1 MB non IUM 4 MB IUM SIUM 8 MB IUM LIAUM Systems can be upgraded by ordering the memory upgrade kits The type of configuration must be consistent throughout the Alliance system This includes all controllers that come with a memory module such as
73. parts necessary for the current project This list also contains parts manually added via drag and drop AL 1170 AL 1191 AL 1410 AL 1680 AL 1685 AL 1812 AL 1831 AL 4017 AL PROF SW DVMRe Pro4 320CDRW SDVR 4P 320 line scrolling LCD keypad with 8 LEDs for status Data bus interface for one Wiegand reader includes one relay Smart proximity card reader with removeable cover available in Magstripe Wiegand reader with 2 LEDs and beeper compatible Metal Enclosure Large UL Metal Enclosure Small Breakaway Relay card 4 MB memory module with over 17 000 users supports up to System Control Panel 16 areas 16 readers 256 inputs 1A no Alliance Professional Software More advanced access intrusion 4 channel color Triplex multiplexer recorder w 320 GB hard 4 channel color triplex multiplexer recorder with 320 GB hard Required JE IEEE Quantity 2 1 2 1 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 GE Security Parts List 3rd Party Parts List User Defined Parts List 68 Alliance Builder User Manual The parts list provides the following information e Part number e Description of the part e Check box that indicates if the part is required by the project in the system layout only parts that have been added to the system layout graphic are indicated as required parts e Quantity required Add GE parts To add an optiona
74. predefined text words in the text word library as possible to ensure that you do not run out of text word resources The numeric field that separates each of the four text words is optional If a number exists between text words and exceeds 255 the system will view this as a text word Chapter 14 239 Zone and relay programming features Zone type Range 0 to 70 Specify the behavior associated with the zone when the system is armed or disarmed See Zone types on page 344 Areas Range 1 to 16 Specify which areas are assigned to the zone When the zone goes into alarm the assigned areas are notified and will dictate what the system should do with the alarm condition i e report the alarm to the central station The ability to program areas is determined by zone type Either areas or alarm groups can be assigned zones but not both Alarm group Range 1 to 138 Specify the assigned alarm group The primary use is to arm disarm areas for limited zone types The ability to program alarm groups is determined by zone type Only zone types 6 pulsed keyswitch 31 latching keyswitch 34 area disarmed alarm group restriction armed and 35 area alarm group restriction armed only allow you to specify the alarm group Either areas or alarm groups can be assigned zones but not both Zone event Range 0 to 255 Specify the event flag that is raised when the zone becomes active Some event flags will be active 24 hours a day othe
75. report see As built tool on page 81 that includes Project summary CSI specification Brochure System overview diagram Installer wiring information Bus layouts Device manuals data sheets Point ID address summary Wireless serial number summary Video integration summary Parts list Battery calculations Cable calculations Wiring diagrams Chapter 1 Introduction Hardware requirements Alliance Builder minimum requirements 600 MHz Pentium 3 or equivalent CPU 256MB RAM 200MB hard drive space for all required software SVGA Monitor 1024 x 768 resolution 16 bit high color 101 Keyboard Mouse or trackball device Network card Video card that supports DX7 Software requirements Alliance Builder minimum requirements Windows 2000 or Windows XP Home Professional operating system Sufficient Windows permissions to install all components Alliance Builder supports the optional ability to export parts lists to Excel spreadsheets One of the following applications must be installed to export Excel parts lists without Excel the parts list can still be exported to a CSV file Excel 2000 Excel XP Excel 2003 5 Alliance Builder User Manual Product specific function limitations The project design and programming options available in Alliance Builder are dependent on the control panel and software management program you select for your project These products are selected when you crea
76. soak test period has elapsed If the zone goes into alarm during the soak test period the soak test period is extended by the amount of time specified in soak test days Engineer walk test Allow an engineering walk test to be conducted by a service technician The engineer walk test is done when areas are not armed so that alarms do not report to the central station or activate relays During this test each zone s frequently used status will be updated as in normal access mode 242 Alliance Builder User Manual Double knock Configure a zone for double knock activation in a certain time interval If this option is enabled and a zone becomes active at the point where the alarm condition will normally be activated two zone timers will be triggered An interval timer is preset with the value programmed in Double knock interval on page 175 and begins counting down A duration timer is also preset with the value contained in Double knock duration on page 176 and counts down Only the following zone types can use the double knock option Type 1 Disarmed alarm Type 2 Armed alarm Type 4 Access alarm Type 14 Access alarm no arm check Event flags Chapter 14 243 Zone and relay programming features External siren Enabled The external siren event flag specified in Area programming is activated during an alarm and all areas assigned to the zone are armed Disabled The external siren event flag is not activated b
77. ssseeseesleeeee III 4 Hardware requirements s s 0 0 06 eee tence ee 5 Software requirements rere kr kp caer tie RE DU idu alee eet VE b RR HD EA 5 Product specific function limitations oooooocoooococcocorrororrororroroo 6 Inti O LP T 9 User interfaces saciar nic es pal Ee T sade UE PERI ER CX eR 10 3e AE eh idos 10 Foro lloro cem 13 Mao ERES 15 Left paneInterfdGe erger reo rods id 16 eripe 17 eo c pecans 17 Property programiuirig soe n e asas 18 Creating projects sss e eruere xev ERES ie 24 Project wizards and templates isiisisssssssssssssssssseeeh 24 Import export projects sare irris eme eR x n REENEN EM SER OSEE E 28 Wd 30 COPY fono 30 Print topic or DOOK osx Ipsa Y ue rr EY EN E ERA 30 Alliance system overview sssesese III 31 RAS remote arming stations ssssssssssssssssssssssss eene 31 DGP data gathering pdriels Geesen SEENEN E SEDE ED 32 ele TT RP 33 ZONES puts Sg t peccans ia bd 33 Reld s oUtpUts Au Szene ERR RPETERD eH PP toas 34 vi Alliance Builder User Manual Chapter 2 VIN TADS ge DER SR AA RE d ad E eA AK rRxX ESSE 35 Projectlisttab 2 Ve AEN REES RE EELER S ER ER 36 OPEN projects EE 36 REMOVE tee 37 View project properties SEENEN as 37 Create NEW DIOJeCls 1i oues e dr steve cic dier ded moneda late EE Hausen 4s E ERE 39 Create from template ici
78. state are forced to arm the zone could raise an alarm This will depend on the zone types assigned 2 4 28 and 68 Prevent forced disarming Enabled Areas cannot be disarmed if there are any zones in the active state Disabled Areas can be disarmed despite any zones being in the active state This option is specific to zone types 1 disarmed alarm and 11 disarmed delayed alarm Alarm group restrictions 1 to 8 Enabled The corresponding alarm group restriction is activated Disabled The corresponding alarm group restriction is disabled Only one restriction per alarm group is allowed Enabling one restriction will disable all others No arming if restriction not timing Enabled An area cannot be armed if a user without an alarm group restriction disarmed it Disabled Normal alarm group restrictions apply If an area has been disarmed and an alarm group restriction timer is not running the alarm group restriction timer cannot be started As soon as the alarm group restriction timer expires the area is armed Chapter 10 Alarm control programming features Change own PIN only Enabled Users can only change their own PIN codes Disabled Users can change other user s PIN codes This will also allow users to access System Menu 14 which provides menus for deleting displaying and creating users This option impacts a user s ability to create delete and change door groups floor groups
79. the RAS address for this reader When not set only the other options will be programmed The RAS must be polled before the reader can be used Protocol options The smart card reader supports the following formats to transmit data e Aritech Wiegand ASC Appendix B Card access Magnetic swipe clock data Door output The smart card reader has an open collector output available the violet wire that can be activated by one of the following events Door output door event flag is active on a valid card being badged Tamper output RAS tamper is active e Card present output magnetic swipe only card is badged e Credit output timed on a valid credit transaction activates the output for a set period as programed in the output time factor e Credit output latched on a valid credit transaction toggles the output The next transaction will reset it Request to exit control Set the supports for request to exit Request to exit is available only in online mode and uses the LED 2 input When connected to ground the door will open The output option has to be set to door output Security mode The security mode is used to determine if programmed smart cards with credits and user defined cards can be read or only blank unprogrammed cards with a unique serial number and user defined cards To use the unsecured mode a special memory module is required Reader token values A token is a value representing dollars cents time or ju
80. the area Programming Program an alarm group with an alarm group restriction enabled and allocate this alarm group number to the zone Program the timed disarmed areas for this zone and complete the other options in Alarm group restriction programming Program the warning time in Timers programming Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 35 Area alarm group restriction armed only A latching keyswitch that has special functions Switching from normal state to active starts the warning time for the alarm group restriction assigned to the alarm group When the warning time expires the area arms Switching from active to normal state does not perform any action Example Arming keyswitch in a large building that indicates that the area is going to arm Programming Program an alarm group with an alarm group restriction enabled and allocate this alarm group number to the zone Program the timed disarmed areas for this zone and complete the other options in Alarm group restriction programming Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 351 352 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 57 Zone types continued Number and name Description 36 Camera 5 count Used to increment the film counter for camera 5 by connecting a normally open contact across the zone The counter increments if the zone switches from open to short This zone can only be used on the Alliance control panel Disarmed flags none Armed flags none
81. the following 1 Use the up down buttons to set the time in minutes for each alarm group restriction needed 1 to 7 2 Click Close to exit the tool Chapter 4 103 Panel device tools Alarm control timers The following alarm control timers are provided Warning time The time a warning will sound indicating the areas are about to arm Alarm group restrictions must be used and areas must be programmed for timed disarmed Delay reporting alarms time The delay time before a burglar alarm BA or BA class tamper alarm TA is reported to the central station It can be used to prevent alarm reporting for users that have problems disarming their area in time Double knock interval The maximum permitted time between a zone becoming active for first time becoming active for the second time If this time is exceeded an alarm condition is registered This timer is used in conjunction with the double knock duration timer Delayed disarm alarm time The delay time before an alarm from a delayed disarmed alarm is reported to the central station Local alarm reminder The time that can elapse between acknowledging a local alarm and an alarm reoccurring including the audible alert Double knock duration The maximum permitted time a zone may remain active If the time is exceeded an alarm condition is registered This timer is used in conjunction with the double knock interval timer To set alarm control timers do the following 1
82. this has the side effect of dictating which areas will be armed disarmed The alarm group settings also determine the arm disarm functionality For example if the alarm group s arm and reset only option in Alarm group programming is enabled assigned areas will only arm If the alarm group s disarm only option in Alarm group programming is enabled the assigned areas will disarm An alarm group defines its own time zone The assigned time zone dictates whether or not the alarm group is valid Since this option also ties in a time zone the assigned alarm group does not need a defined time zone If you use an existing alarm group with a defined time zone make sure the same time zone is used in the Time zone number option above Chapter 10 203 Alarm control programming features Automatic reset Automatic reset provides a mechanism that can automatically reset alarms after a specified period of time When an automatic reset is configured for an alarm group all alarms contained in the alarm group are reset after the amount of time specified has expired post alarm The automatic reset function is useful in instances where it may not be possible to reset alarms manually Programming The following programming options are available for automatic reset Time before alarm will reset Range 1 to 255 minutes Specify the amount of time that will elapse after an alarm has been triggered and before the alarm group it belongs to automatically res
83. timer starts and activating the zone will not generate an alarm if the area is armed and the zone is activated the entry timer starts When the entry time has expired an alarm is generated Example Emergency door that is also used to enter the premises Programming Program the entry exit time in Area programming and enable the buzzers in RAS programming Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 43 Disarmed zone to event When the area is disarmed and the zone is activated opened or shorted flag the zone event flag is activated When the area is armed no action is taken Example Opening a cupboard activates an audible warning Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags none 44 Emergency door with Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed but does not report it alarm group restriction to the central station Generates an alarm when the area is armed The zone can be disabled when two users with alarm group restrictions enter their user code not necessarily in the same area Example Emergency door Programming Program an alarm group and an alarm group restriction Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 45 Event flag armed alarm Activates the zone event flag when the area is disarmed Generates an alarm group restriction alarm when the area is armed The
84. to the zone Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 66 Final door set This zone type is used to shorten the exit timer when the sensor associated with this zone is activated normally on an exit door When activated it shortens the exit timer to 4 seconds If not needed set the exit time to 0 67 Latched detector This zone type has a 24 hour alarm that can be isolated and associated with a latched detector event flag 68 Antimask detector This zone type is the same as zone type 2 Armed alarm It gives a special indication for remote diagnostics purposes 357 358 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 57 Zone types continued Number and name Description 69 Alarm APCO zone Does not generate an alarm when the area is disarmed Generates an alarm when the area is armed Bypassed during the entry exit timed periods The zone must be closed when arming the areas Disarmed flags none Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 70 Keybox This zone type is linked to the keybox timer It has a 24 hour alarm When the keybox zone is active keybox door lid will not be opened during exit or keybox timer it reports an alarm to the ARC Glossary This section explains some terms as they apply to Alliance Builder Table 58 Alliance Builder terms explained Term Definition Access control The control of entry to or exit from a security area Active When use
85. tone Description 0 Disabled 1 CTR21 2 Netherlands 3 UK 4 Other X25 TEl value Range to 63 Specify the value given by the telecom for the ISDN connection Audio listen in time Range 10 to 255 seconds Specify the total audio time transmitted Audio listen in frame time Range 30 to Audio listen in time seconds Specify the frame interval that the audio is transmitted Audio listen in time option dictates maximum range Chapter 12 219 Reporting programming features Central station communications options Tone dialing Enabled Use tone dialing for PSTN telephone lines Disabled Use pulse dialing for PSTN telephone lines This option is not used for ISDN connections Enabled line fault monitor Enabled The system will detect if the line voltage on the telephone network is within limits If not a telephone line fault condition will be activated Disabled Line fault monitoring is disabled This option should only be used for PSTN connections 3 digit SIA extensions Enabled SIA and XSIA reporting uses 3 digit numbers Disabled SIA and XSIA reporting uses 2 digit numbers When 2 digit numbers are used any number above 99 3 digit numbers will be converted to 99 ISDN point to point Enabled ISDN point to point enabled Disabled ISDN point to multipoint enabled This option should only be used for ISDN connections Enable ISDN line fault monitor Enable
86. tool on page 84 e Auto layout tool on page 84 Installer administration tool on page 85 e Device property window tool on page 89 e Export tool on page 90 14 Alliance Builder User Manual Panel device tools The bottom two rows of tools are used for programming functions that will be downloaded to the control panel These tools include Device addressing tool on page 94 Programming viewers tool on page 95 Text words tool on page 100 Event flag descriptions tool on page 101 Timers tool on page 102 Programming validator tool on page 106 Virtual relays tool on page 107 DVMRs camera tool on page 108 Current control panel tool on page 109 DGP RAS numbering graphics on page 110 Chapter 1 15 Introduction View tabs The view tabs are located below the toolbar and to the right of the left pane interface Figure 5 shows the view tabs as they appear when a project is open In this view the Project list tab is hidden Figure 5 View tabs THE System Bus Layout jE Parts List ZE weg Diagrams Eh Battery Calc Ech Cable Calo The tabs include e Project list tab on page 36 e System bus layout tab on page 44 e Local bus layout tab on page 58 e Control panel programming tab on page 62 e Parts list tab on page 67 e Wiring diagrams tab on page 74 e Battery calculation tab on page 75 Cable calculation tab on page 77 When you open Alliance Builder the Project list tab will be active To enable the other view tabs you must
87. understood to be off premises Chapter 7 145 Door programming features Shunt until door closed Enabled Shunt the defined zones as programmed in the shunt zones option in Door hardware programming see Shunt zones on page 155 until the door is closed When the door is opened and the shunt is not active the zone will generate an alarm Disabled The shunt timer will be used Cancel shunt after door secures Enabled Shunt the defined zones as programmed in the shunt zones option in Door hardware programming see Shunt zones on page 155 until the door is closed Opening the door again within the shunt time is not possible and will generate an alarm Disabled The shunt timer will be used and the door can be reopened during the shunt time 146 Alliance Builder User Manual Door request to exit RTE programming The following programming options are available for the door request to exit feature RTE time zone Range 0 to 24 Define a valid time in which a RTE request to exit button will unlock and or shunt a door in order to allow exiting When the time zone is valid pressing the RTE button will unlock and or shunt the door if the time zone is not valid pressing the RTE button will not unlock and or shunt the door RTE Define the RTE request to exit behavior by choosing one of the following RTE timed When the RTE button is pressed the door unlocks for the unlock time RTE held As long as the
88. when connecting a Wiegand reader to the 4 door controller s reader port In fact you can view the reader port as an onboard AL 1170 The four reader ports located on the 4 door elevator controller are by default the IN readers for the door Each of these four doors has one reader port assigned The reader ports have the following assignments e Reader Port 1 Assigned bus address 1 RAS 1 e Reader Port 2 Assigned bus address 2 RAS 2 e Reader Port 3 Assigned bus address 3 RAS 3 e Reader Port 4 Assigned bus address 4 RAS 4 Some devices such as Wiegand readers do not have provisions for bus addresses Therefore when configuring RAS devices within a 4 door controller the first four RAS Chapter 7 Door programming features numbers correspond to the reader ports The reader port number follows the RAS number address Door RAS numbering Table 11 shows the door RAS numbering scheme Table 11 Door RAS numbering scheme Door number IN RAS address IN RAS address OUT RAS address OUT RAS address 1s Door lor Reader Port 5 9 13 1 2 Door 2 or Reader Port 2 6 10 14 3 Door 3 or Reader Port 3 7 11 15 4 Door 4 or Reader Port 4 8 12 16 Functions Doors can be used for the following functions Onboard relays Each door can directly access one of the four onboard relays on the 4 door controller Under most circumstances this relay is assigned the unlock relay Onboard zones Ea
89. zone can be disabled if two users with alarm group restrictions enter their user codes not necessarily in the same area Programming Program an alarm group and an alarm group restriction Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag Table 57 Zone types continued Appendix F Zone types Number and name Description 46 Disarmed alarm armed general alarm Generates an alarm if the area is disarmed Generates a general burglar alarm if the area is armed Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 47 Disarm alarm suspicion armed general alarm While disarmed the generation of an alarm activates the cameras When the zone closes to its normal state the cameras continue to operate for the suspicion time Generates a general alarm if the area is armed Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 48 Camera 1 film out Generates an alarm when camera 1 is out of film Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 49 Camera 2 film out Generates an alarm when camera 2 is out of film Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 50 Camera 3 film out Generates an alarm when camera 3 is out of film Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 51 Camera 4 film out Generates an alarm when camera
90. 1 to 138 assigned to the RAS Door event flag Event flag 0 to 255 assigned to the RAS Is polled If checked the RAS is programmed to be polled LCD RAS If checked the RAS has an LCD keypad Use entry exit buzzer If checked the RAS buzzer will sound when associated entry exit timers start The properties shown in the viewer are programmed in the System bus layout tab For information on all RAS programming options see RAS remote arming stations on page 112 DGP devices viewer This viewer shows the following basic DGP device properties programmed in the project Address System address number 1 to 15 assigned by Alliance Builder Description DGP description Is polled If checked the DGP is programmed to be polled DGP type DGP type standard 4 door controller wireless or point ID indicated by the DGP part number 96 Alliance Builder User Manual The properties shown in the viewer are programmed in the System bus layout tab For information on all DGP programming options see DGP data gathering panels on page 120 4 door elevator controllers on page 123 Point ID DGP on page 129 and Wireless DGP on page 132 Zones viewer This tab shows the following basic zone properties programmed in the project Number Zone number Name Descriptive zone name that will be transferred to the control panel and RAS Zone type Zone type 0 to 70 that specifies the behavior associated with the zone Zone reporting code The
91. 103 E A si a 6 Ancillary Devices D O Ancillary Devices P The rules regarding device placement include e Acontrol panel must be on the system bus layout before any other device can be added e The first RAS device added to the system must be a keypad As devices are added to the layout the changes are reflected in the status bar at the bottom of the window Devices can not be added to the layout if their addition will exceed the maximum number allowed for the system as indicated in the status bar see Status bar on page 17 Remove system devices To remove a system device from the layout area right click the device and select Remove device from the right click menu or left click the device to select it and hit the Delete key on your keyboard Since a control panel is required for all systems Alliance Builder will not allow you to remove the only control panel from the layout 48 Alliance Builder User Manual If you are removing a device such as a DGP that includes ancillary devices in the same enclosure a confirmation box requires you to confirm the removal of all devices and the enclosure You cannot remove the DGP device without removing all other devices in the enclosure and the enclosure itself After devices are removed Alliance Builder will renumber and configure the remaining devices in the layout area and the status bar will reflect the those changes Use the Auto layout tool on page 84 to update the layout s
92. 10P 600 IB SDVR 16P 320 IB SDVR 16P 600 B g Ancillary Devices MA AL 1206 Relay Expanders Ae E altera Databus CH BB ai 1201 BB aL243 Ancillary Card Size Code m 2 E 3 a ES ES 4 RAST Control Panels 1 8 Zones 32 256 Relays 11 255 Doors 4 48 Elevators 0 48 34 Software The graphic in the layout will always represent the currently selected control panel When you open a project the layout will automatically populate with the information for that project and the programming options supported by that project will be active Chapter 2 View tabs The System bus layout tab is a multilevel tab From this tab you can invoke the following additional tabs Local bus layout tab To invoke the Local bus layout tab double click a 4 door or 4 elevator control DGP device graphic on the System bus layout The Local bus layout tab will populate with the information of the selected DGP device See Local bus layout tab on page 58 Control panel programming tab To invoke the Control panel programming tab double click the control panel graphic on the System bus layout tab The Control panel programming tab provides programming options for the control panel and the Alliance system See Control panel programming tab on page 62 Left pane tabs The tabs on the left side of the left pane interface access the following Control panel tab The Control panel tab c
93. 270 EE 241 A e 117 237 7442 117 np m 249 Dj n 101 264 268 event i E T tice ee ierit rie ert egens 101 264 268 rM 269 OLLIE sc tie ree tH eere e hooves 269 armed alarm eeepc E 265 battery A eege 270 e 266 description 101 266 disarmed alarm tii 265 AUTOS CERE o SERRE LP RR PUN 269 engineer walk test eiecit tetti eie 270 external SION 5 iesesce eser vest eese vere e etu tape tarea di 268 2770 FIM OUL C eene 269 J se Tall a aat bn tede 269 E throat rotta 243 265 IS A TN 270 metal ida 270 low batery NS 269 number predefined DA O A A ON relay activated by NOU TL EE A EE T EEEE AMPE E lest MODE cite ie er E HERD eer esee Pea deus fest AD T VIEW C event flags to0L ici ENEE sodio reel epe Pe essc rre tet o eet ee or zc MER RON 11 EXPANSION me 33 export 90 extended access EIE ee ito ic epu da e CORRER 141 external E di id di s 105 243 SEI UE 155 i rm 11 film 367 368 Alliance Builder User Manual UL C MA 101 264 268 log 157 1157 e HO vee 157 UNE ii tada 235 fuse TAM forse c M 269 hard time zone HO dar tete e aene DrOST WII aere
94. 281 Wireless DGP BE enu 3 g Ancillary Devices Relay Expanders BB AL 1810 Bl aL 1813 Databus BB AL 1740 HOH Wl aL sem Ancillary Card Size Code f f a E Create New Project Import APF Archive EQ To create a new project click Create new project This invokes the Alliance project builder wizard see Create new projects on page 39 that will guide you through the necessary steps to create a new project In the wizard you will provide project information and select a control panel enclosure and other components that make up a basic Alliance system Completing the wizard creates a new project containing all of the project information and components selected in the wizard and adds the project to the project list To create a new project using an existing project or a template click Create from template see Create from template on page 41 This invokes the Template wizard that will guide you through the necessary steps to create a new project Using the Template wizard will make the process of programming a project much faster and easier Choose the template that 1s closest to the project you need and the product selection and some of the properties programming will be done automatically When you complete the wizard the new project will be added to the project list 25 26 Alliance Builder User Manual When you select the new project from the project list the S
95. 37 Camera 6 count Used to increment the film counter for camera 6 by connecting a normally open contact across the zone The counter increments if the zone switches from open to short This zone can only be used on the Alliance control panel Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 38 Camera 7 count Used to increment the film counter for camera 7 by connecting a normally open contact across the zone The counter increments if the zone switches from open to short This zone can only be used on the Alliance control panel Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 39 Camera 8 count Used to increment the film counter for camera 8 by connecting a normally open contact across the zone The counter increments if the zone switches from open to short This zone can only be used on the Alliance control panel Disarmed flags none Armed flags none Table 57 Zone types continued Appendix F Zone types Number and name Description 40 Disarmed suspicion delayed armed alarm If the area is disarmed it has the following functions Shorted Activates cameras in the areas that are assigned to the zone When the zone switches back to normal the cameras continue to operate for the suspicion time Normal No alarm Active Generates an alarm but does not report to the central station until the delayed alarm timer has expired or a second delayed alarm is activated Open Tamper alarm Generates a general burglar ala
96. 5 test time arming station RAS 112 JUNCOS 113 proeramming 3 On a ee pte eia 113 PESADA RARA 116 ALIN AUSTIN pocas ia 102 programming viewer 103 ASS DUM EE audio listen in auto layout automatic armddisarmm ooooonocnconconcnnnonncononnnonnonn cnn nonncnncononos 201 DEOBFOIMIMINS cia ii idad 201 autortiatic Teset nina radiata 203 bank vault area oare A 185 battery test KT C cable calculation ENEE 77 82 CAMA iii cris 81 108 244 EE 244 TL E 249 OOP EVENT c 249 SEO eege Edge etri eerie dev 150 OOP Te dEk iiie ites Qo egi 150 365 366 Alliance Builder User Manual central Station iier terere er Fette he iaia en 214 account number aii ties teet eR reae 214 COMMUNICATIONS PREND 217 CONNECHON TY e 216 ATH Mt 214 A sesser anaa 216 format Ung E phone number eerte tte ette eroe ien 214 programming eite tieni degen DAG 214 Channel M A 245 Oe Me EE 207 C 240 LE 240 communications s ayer sir eaei itens enska tr irti E iren Eai Eees TETE 217 COMMECHION type AA Eed 216 Dj M 30 Control panel ete As 109 160 current ELE COPY LOPICS E CPD Ee senses edis nien e e eU Creating e 24 CSI specifications 81 custom event flag retenti e euer 266 Custom DESEN ent yea etn 263 delay reporting alarms sese 103
97. 5 assigned No alarm control Assigned to users Note Alarm group 9 assigns the special soft time zone 25 reserved for service technicians Refer to Soft time zones on page 233 for more details 10 Spare alarm group All user menu options disabled Cannot access any areas Assigned to devices Functions Alarm groups can be used for the following functions Alarm control The ability of a user to arm disarm the system Users When adding a user to the system the assigned alarm group will dictate the user alarm capabilities RAS devices When adding a RAS device to the system the assigned alarm group will dictate the possible alarm control capabilities supported by the device as well as which areas the RAS can control The RAS device also allows setting a different alarm group in order to dictate the possible menu selections Intelligent doors When adding an intelligent door to the system the assigned alarm group will dictate the possible alarm control capabilities supported by the door Alternate Each alarm group allows setting an alternate alarm group in case the original is disabled due to an invalid time zone Chapter 10 191 Alarm control programming features Programming The following programming options are available for alarm groups Alarm group number Range 1 to 138 Specify the alarm group to program Note Alarm groups 1 to 10 are hard coded Refer to Hard coded alarm groups on page 189 Alarm group name Rang
98. 533 Preparation 472 Penset 167 Principal 473 Performing art center 469 Print 311 Perimeter 168 Printery 474 Personnel 321 Production 475 Phone 169 Productivity 310 PIR 170 Professional support 476 360 PIR 322 Protection 175 Pit 287 Public waiting 477 Plant 288 Pull 176 Playroom 470 Pump 177 Appendix C Text word library Q Quiet learning 478 R Rack 178 Representative 190 Radio 179 Reprographic production 480 Raid 180 Request to exit 518 Ramp 181 Research 264 RAS 317 Resource center 481 Reader 182 Resource store 482 Rear 183 Retrofit 300 Receiving 184 RF 306 Receiving dock 407 Right 191 Receiving door 378 Riser 309 Reception 185 Road 192 Record 186 Roller door 193 Reed switch 187 Roof 194 Reference 479 Room 195 Refrigeration 188 RSB 263 Register 307 Rumpus 196 Remote 189 317 318 Alliance Builder User Manual S Safe 197 SRT 219 Sales 305 SSO 544 Savings 270 ST 314 School 483 Staff 220 Science 484 Staff amp amenities 495 Screen 198 Staff areas 1 to 4 525 Secretary 199 Staff areas 5 to 8 526 Security 324 Staff door 380 Seismic 207 Staff window bypass 521 Selling 200 Staff entry 409 Senior staff 529 Staff lounge 496 Senior staff second TZ 535 Staff room 487 Senior staff third TZ 537 Staff second TZ 534 Sensor 201 Staff th
99. 6 157 158 159 160 10 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 11 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 12 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 13 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 14 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 15 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 Since the control panel consumes address 0 up to 15 addresses that can be used for DGP devices By default each DGP device consumes a single DGP address However by expanding the number of zones a DGP device can control with a zone expansion module a DGP device can consume zone numbers available in two addresses Other DGP devices in the system can not use the second address or any of the 16 zone numbers assigned to the address 325 326 Alliance Builder User Manual Example 1 If the control panel on the system bus has an 8 zone expansion module the control panel will consume the 16 zones in address 0 zones 1 through 16 and the first 8 zones in address 1 zones 17 through 24 In this instance zones 25 through 32 will not be used by the control panel and will not be available for any other device The dark gray shading in Table 50 indicates the addresses and zones consumed by the control panel The first address available fo
100. 7 FLR 325 Factory manager 442 Foil 095 Fail 276 Food 277 Failure 088 Forced door 278 Fashion 089 Foyer 096 Fence 090 Freezer 097 File 091 Front 098 Film 092 Front counter 379 Fire 093 Front door keypad bank 1 538 Fitness testing 443 Front door keypad bank 2 542 Floor 094 G Games 099 Group 12 386 Gaming 283 Group 13 387 Gas 100 Group 14 388 Garden 101 Group 15 389 Garage 102 Group 16 390 Gate 103 Group 17 391 Genera 104 Group 18 392 General circulation 445 Group 19 393 General staff 530 Group 20 394 General staff 1 519 Group 21 395 General staff 2 532 Group 22 396 GLA 446 Group 23 397 Appendix C Text word library GLA stage 447 Group 24 398 Glass 105 Group 25 399 Goods 328 Group 26 400 Graphics 448 Group 27 401 Grd Flr 312 Group 28 401 Groundsman store 449 Group 29 403 Ground 106 Guard 450 Group 303 Gun 279 Group 11 385 Gym 315 H Hall 107 High SSO 527 Hallway 444 Holdup 110 Hand 108 Holdup bar 361 Hatch 327 Holdup button 382 Heat 109 Home economics 451 High level user master 364 In 111 Instrument store 452 Inertia 280 Interior 113 Inner 281 Internal 114 Input 112 Isolate 524 313 314 Alliance Builder User Manual J Janitor 453 Junction 365 Jewelry 115 K Key 355 Kiosk 348 Keypad 302 Kitchen 117
101. 9 1011121314 15 16 IA Wir System Bus Layout 15 Parts List ZE Wiring Diagrams E Battery Calc Bk Cable Calc m Control Panel DGP 1 d DGF 6G Ancillary Devices Ancillary Devices 5 Zone Expanders WB AL 1206 Relay Expanders BB alero E altera E CH Databus B CSI Wain urgay Ls RSA inan Ancillary Card Size Code Control Panels 1 8 Menu bar Relays 5 255 Do ai Elevato om 34 Software The menu bar shown in Figure 3 is located at the top of the window Figure 3 Menu bar File Tools Parts Help Chapter 1 11 Introduction File The File menu includes the following options New project Access the New project selection window to select the type of new project you want to create The choices are e Standard project using the New project wizard see Create new projects on page 39 e Create a project based on an existing project or on a GE Security template see Create from template on page 41 Import a project via the Import project wizard see Import export projects on page 28 Close project Closes the currently selected project and opens the Project list tab Save project Saves the changes and updates that you have made to the current project Recent projects Select a project to open from a list of recently created or updated projects Project properties Access the Alliance project properties window to view contact numbers customer
102. A TR Seer 223 tele AM A Ai coa 223 xiii Chapter 13 Time and date programming features 225 Hard timezones icone x e e EUER ee XR Tea aa 226 Elle le 226 PROGFGMUMUING DEE 227 ahi d PE T 228 A ESEE EE EN 228 Programmi eseuen er e enm the E E E EE RAR R E e Kate 228 Chapter 14 Zone and relay programming features 229 E EEN 230 UDO ETT 231 Prograrminlig sees epe v REESE DAR ena as 231 Soft TIME ZONES A seh y er re y Hide deere See RE EA a ERE E E FUE 233 OCH A Ads 233 H le 233 Programmihg assiduo ecce mes etre ote ee eremed ee d bbc re eb ted 233 ZONES erm 236 FUNCLIONS ELECTED 237 PROGFOMIMING ws deesse pp Canaan Newt Vines keenest cer Ad ead tne Shanes 238 Zone TER 246 PUNCUOMS E aes 246 Programrtnihg Jesse ebd heme cr RR on aa ener e Sa tie 247 xiv Alliance Builder User Manual Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Appendix A Miscellaneous programming features 251 Control panel options cece cee cece Ie eh 252 ele te pp le TEE 252 Custom LCD message v oscev evo rEEDC E PEG e RE Ya n eee ERE RP 263 Prograrimilrigiussassnsz ner et E ARE wetrerecuoe es 263 Event Fldgs EE 264 Predefined event flags 0c cece cece cence ete eee e me 265 Cisto event MAGS nc Minh are ebrei eR ee ae eee Eee t idee 266 Event flag description 266 PUI CH ONS ETE 267 rele E EE
103. Alliance Builder User Manual Copyright Disclaimer Trademarks and patents Software license agreement Copyright 2005 GE Security Inc All righ THE OF THE USE OR APPLICATION OF ANY OF MENTATION CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SUPPL This publication may ples may include fic of actual businesses or persons is entirely contain examples o GE and the GE monogram are registered trademar Other trade names used in this document may be turers or vendors of the respective products IMPORTANT THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT GE SECURITY AND YOU READ THE FOLLOWING TER OR USING THIS SOFTWARE THIS AGREEMENT PROV SOFTWARE IT ALSO CONTAINS WARRANTY INFORMA NG AND OR USING THE SOFTWARE CONFIR THE SOFTWARE OR IF ALREADY INSTALLED I 1 License In this Agreement you the purchaser o referred to as You or Your whether an individual or a erms and conditions of this Agreement GE Security modified versions updates additions and copies of your supplier and or authorized reseller Supplier ation are referred to as the Licensed Product All rights to and in and trade secrets may install the software on the number o he Software You automatically terminate in the event of such a trans sublicense the Software You may not copy or modi or backup purposes You may use the original copy purposes You agree that GE SECURITY a Software for compliance with the terms and conditio
104. DGP description will not be shown on the LCD keypads When creating a name for a system resource that does use text words the existing text word library is searched for any matches in the resource name and existing text words are used If however the words contained in the name description do not exactly match one of the predefined words you can add a user defined text word The Text word tool on the toolbar provides a searchable list of both predefined and user defined text words Functions Text words can be used for the following functions Resource naming Text words allow system resources to have associated custom names which are reported on LCD keypads for ease of use and clarity Reporting System resources with text word names will show the text word name for reporting and logging For example if zone 1 was assigned the text word Front Door Main Entrance Zone and the zone is in alarm then that exact zone name is reported along with the zone number Under most circumstances text words are limited to 16 characters Zones however allow up to four text words and four numbers The above example incorporates more than one text word 271 272 Alliance Builder User Manual Programming The following programming options are available for text words Text word number Range 900 to 999 Specify the user defined text word number Control panel number Specify the control panel that is associated with this user defin
105. IN card number box Users 1 to 1000 can have a PIN and or card Users 1001 to 11 466 can only have a card unless a software IUM is used The PIN is created and is only valid when used with Card and PIN function on a 4 door elevator controller All users can have a name in the software however only the first 200 names will be downloaded 50 if the system does not have any memory expansion Trace All alarm and access functions done by the user will cause a trace message to be sent to the application software Card only The user will not be able to use the PIN code This allows the PIN code field to be used to program cards on formats not normally compatible with a special reader is used Privileged The user s code card will override any antipassback restrictions Extended access The user will be allowed extended door unlock times Alarm group The user s alarm group is used to assign alarm control and menu functions Door group The user s door group determines through which doors and at what times the user can access the facility Floor group The user s floor group determines through which floors and at what times the user can access the facility Comments Add comments regarding the current user Card issue When using card readers in combination with IUM modules or when smart cards are being programmed with a smart card programmer the following card details can be edited User number The selected user number
106. PIN 50 50 50 Access logged events 10 10 10 Alarm logged events 250 250 250 Onboard zones 16 8 8 Onboard relays physical and virtual 5 5 5 8 Alliance Builder User Manual Alliance management software program limitations The Alliance management software programs provide the features shown in Table 2 Table2 Alliance management software programs Alliance Alliance Feature Professional Enterprise Number of work stations 1 4 Database engine Borland BDE Microsoft MSDE TCP IP LAN connectivity Yes Yes Software licensing required No Yes Maximum number of control panels 8 32 Management via dial up Yes Yes Reports Yes Yes Bulk user update Yes No Graphical maps Yes Yes Video integration Yes Yes Maximum number of DVMRs 2 8 Photo ID licensing required No Yes Note The firmware version in your control panel may also set limitations when you export your project to an Alliance software management program Chapter 1 Introduction Initial log on When you first execute the software you access the Log on screen Figure 1 Figure 1 Log on screen GE Security Alliance Builder Selected Language Engish Unted states Login Password Go H Exit El To log on the first time use the following defaults Installer ALLIANCE INSTALLER Password 998765 After you log on for the first time we recommend that you change the default password To
107. R383 TR Bypass restore R570 BU 25 Burglar Burglar 138 BA Alarm E138 BA near alarm Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 BB Alarm restore R138 BR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 BU 26 General alarm General 140 UA Alarm E140 UA general alarm Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 UB Alarm restore R140 UR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 UU 27 General alarm General 141 UA Alarm E141 GA polling loop open due Gem 7A Bypass E570 GB Alarm restore R141 GR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 GU 337 338 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 56 Zone event reporting continued Type number Class Sub class Condition ele SIA 28 General alarm General 142 UA Alarm E142 ZA polling loop short Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 ZB Alarm restore R142 ZR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 ZU 29 General alarm General 143 ET Alarm E145 SA exp module fail Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 SB Alarm restore R143 SR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 SU 30 General alarm General 144 TA Alarm E144 WA sensor tamper Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 WB Alarm restore R144 WR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 WU 31 General alarm General 145 TA Alarm E145 BA exp module tamper Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 BB Alarm restore R145 BR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 BU Table 56 Zone event reporting co
108. RTE button is pressed the door is held unlocked for as long as the unlock time or the button continues to be pressed whichever is longer RTE only shunts When the RTE button is pressed the zone is shunted but the door does not open RTE options Chapter 7 147 Door programming features IN RTE disabled when armed Enabled The RTE button does not unlock the IN door if any of the areas assigned to the door are armed Disabled The RTE button unlocks the IN door regardless of the status of the areas assigned to the door The RTE button must be wired to the 4 door controller Area assignments are made in the Area option in Door hardware programming see Areas on page 156 OUT RTE disabled when armed Enabled The RTE button does not unlock the OUT door if any of the areas assigned to the door are armed Disabled The RTE button unlocks the OUT door regardless of the status of the areas assigned to the door The RTE button must be wired to the 4 door controller Area assignments are made in the Area option in Door hardware programming see Areas on page 156 Request to exit reporting Enabled When RTE zone is active a report is generated and sent to both the printer and management software Disabled No report is generated 148 Alliance Builder User Manual Door alarm control programming The following programming options are available for the door alarm control feature Alarm group Range
109. Relay programming see Time zone on page 232 assign time zone 42 Function keys Table details the function keys Table 28 Function keys Function key Soft time zone range Chapter 14 Zone and relay programming features 2 seconds RAS 1 function keys F1 F4 42 to 45 RAS 2 function keys F1 F4 46 to 49 RAS 3 function keys F1 F4 50 to 53 RAS 4 function keys F1 F4 54 to 57 RAS 5 function keys F1 F4 58 to 61 RAS 1 to 16 F1 function key pressed more than 2 62 seconds RAS 1 to 16 F2 F4 function keys pressed more than 63 235 236 Alliance Builder User Manual Zones A zone also known as an input is typically a sensor wired either directly into the control panel through a DGP or through an expander board When the zone is in its active state a signal is passed to the control panel and depending on a variety of conditions further action may be taken Typical sensors include e Motion sensors e Glassbreak sensors e Buttons such as push buttons or RTE buttons Within the system zones can also be used in conjunction with event flags in order to establish logical states Each zone is programmed to accept an event flag that is raised whenever the zone becomes active For example system macros are based on creating logical equations from a series of event flags When one or more event flags are active in a logical true state the system will perform some other function
110. S a a a a aa E 267 SUStEM event flags 3 a EE ras 268 FUNCIONS MEUM 268 POD MIMI sre gr E aa adei neit CP restes Wand i E 269 Text WOrdS MeL 271 EEMOL Rakin pada reden at 271 PLOMO ETE 272 Maintenance and support ooooooccccccccccn oo 273 Maintenance e ion a a 274 MSDE database 274 eee tii 274 APF arce ii daa 274 Recornmerided probeier ed dE AEN EE A EE 275 Contacting technical support 276 Online publication aremt te E rer rrr e Rb ot 276 leen isi Hed etx ERI PRESARERa PP RE Weki X SUE 277 Boolean logic idad ia airis 278 Logical OR ele 278 Logical AND Operator 0 cece cee cece s me 279 Logical NOT Operator 0 cece cece cece me 280 COMBINGUOMIOGIC ec RR Eb Cre ep paar erbe b penn ERG 281 Examples of macros applied to Boolean log 283 COMMONIY used moere SSES KN NENNEN NNN NEE ENN NEEN ENN 291 Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F a kee 297 Card and card reader pes 298 Card formats and data fields ooooooooococccccocconnccccrnnco oo 298 Smart card programming 299 Reader configuration cards cece cece eee cece e eee enn 300 System CODES ii eei D vends yup enS taa nS vp ed shied eee ds 302 ol M 302 IUM intelligent user module and memory 2s cece ee eee eee eee eens 303 Url ES 304 Card read Sequences i EEN ERENNERT DR ERR E AIRE 306 Text word library esas be Edd ica m di Reda 307 Text word library
111. T NOTICE GE ASSUMES NO S ANY LIABILITIES aily operations Exam he manufac AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN S AND CONDITIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE DESA NSTALLING USE THE ITATIONS THESE OT INSTALL WARE AND LICENSE FROM GE SECURITY TO DISCLAIMERS AND LIABILITY LI BOUND BY any kind Subject to the software including any upgrades rom the Software and Documen he Licensed Product including but not limited to copyrights patents trademarks belong to GE SECURITY and GE SECURITY retains title to each copy of the Software You may only install and use the Software on a single computer workstation or terminal Computing Device at one time unless You have purchased additiona Computing Devi may not use the Software over a computer networ distribute the Licensed Product to others in electronic format or otherwise and this Agreement shall copies of the Software in which case You ces for which You have purchased copies of You may not transfer or er or distribution You may not sell rent lease or y the Licensed Product for any purpose including of the Software provided to You for backup ns of You any time upon reasonable notice may audit Your use of the his Agreement may terminate this Agreement by unin stalling all components of the Software from all Computing Devices and returning the Licensed Product to GE SECURITY GE SECURITY may terminate this t
112. T readers on the 4 door elevator controller When a user is granted access at a door the user is assigned that particular region For more information see Regions on page 186 Bank vault areas Bank vault areas are areas designated as high security requirements The system will automatically arm all bank vault areas after a preset delay For more information see Bank vault areas on page 185 Floor Floors descriptions are used to identify floors within elevators during programming They are not downloaded to the control panel 64 Alliance Builder User Manual Time and date Hard time zones Hard time zones define periods of time including the time and of day and the day of the week and holidays that are typically used to allow or prevent certain actions from taking place For more information see Hard time zones on page 226 Holidays Holidays are used in conjunction with time zones in order to define additional access parameters For more information see Holidays on page 228 Diagnostics Next service call This feature allows you to set a date for programmed text to display on the LCD arming station indicating that the next routine service call is due For more information see Next service on page 209 Test call The test call performs a regular interval report call to the central station to ensure that central station reporting is working and that no problems have occurred that would prevent it from reporting access and alarm ev
113. The following programming options are available for voice reporting Event number Range to 25 Specify the event to associate this voice report with Each voice report can be programmed using either a standard event number 1 to 11 or an event number that exists in the user defined event tables 12 to 25 as shown in Table 26 Using an event from the user tables 12 to 25 allows for greater flexibility as macros can then be used to trigger these event codes from various sources Note that event code 12 130 BA Burglary and event code 1 Burglar Alarm are the same event code 130 If event code 12 130 BA Burglary is programmed with an alarm message it will have priority over event code 1 Burglar Alarm Table 26 Event numbers Event number Name T Burglar Alarm 2 Tamper Alarm 3 Hold up Alarm 4 Panic Alarm 5 Emergency Alarm 6 Medical Alarm 7 Technical Alarm 8 AC Fail 9 DGP Offline 224 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 26 Event numbers continued Event number Name 10 Area Armed 11 Area Disarmed 12 130 BA Burglary 13 131 BA Perimeter 14 132 BA Interior 15 133 BA 24 Hour 16 134 BA Entry Exit 17 135 BA Day Night 18 136 BA Outdoor 19 137 BA Tamper 20 138 BA Near Alarm 21 140 UA General Alarm 22 YT Battery Low 23 YR Battery Restore 24 AR AC Restore 25 ZR Technical Restore Voice message number Ra
114. Use timers to set an appropriate amount of time for users to perform actions without generating an alarm For example if a user required a door to stay unlocked for a significant amount of time you can program the door unlock time to keep the door unlocked for the necessary amount of time without generating an alarm 171 172 Alliance Builder User Manual Programming The following programming options are available for timers Alarm group restriction 1 to 7 disarmed time Range 0 to 255 minutes Determine the amount of time the associated areas will be disarmed After the specified amount of time has elapsed the area will be automatically armed again The alarm group restriction must be programmed for timed disarm in Alarm group restriction programming see Timed disarmed areas on page 198 and be assigned to an alarm group for this timer to be used Program the individual times for each alarm group restriction 1 to 7 for the period of time the associated area should be disarmed The associated area will be armed after the specified timer expires If the Alarm group restriction disarmed time is left at zero and the restriction is programmed for an alarm group the associated area will not be rearmed The Alarm group restriction disarmed time will be overridden by the Area disarmed time if any time but zero has been programmed for the associated area If the alarm group restriction is being used in conjunction with Autoarm di
115. a wireless DGP or by analog in the case of the control panel s hard wired connection See Zone types on page 344 for a complete list of zone types Relays outputs Relays follow the same numbering as zones see Numbering on page 324 You can have a maximum of 16 relays per device regardless of expanders A relay can be inverted to reverse the active and normal state from normally open to normally on Relay programming Events are mapped to relays through the following two methods e Macro logic programming applies a logical set of events to activate a relay output depends on output selection For example a system event 24 hour alarm and particular zone event can be macro programmed to trigger a particular relay see Macro logic on page 166 e Relay programming uses a single event to trigger a relay output A door event flag is the most common example see Relays on page 230 Chapter2 View tabs Use the view tabs to open create design and program projects In this chapter Project list tab ccs roc ee cuota eL cer itre E System bus layout dab secos teta mene Local bus layout TOD d de nes td cese trek deeg Control panel programming tab Pora lot GE sob ca pa ake Kei ea OR NC ta Miri diagrams tab oore ee ba ee ae ots Battery calculation tab Cable QC anon TAP ooi ocu SA E ne ek 36 Alliance Builder User Manual Project list tab Use the Project list tab Figure 12 to create new projects and to access a li
116. ace modules Interface modules support the ability to add Wiegand readers to the RS485 bus Applicable to both the system and the local bus Chapter 5 113 RAS programming features Functions RAS devices can be used for the following functions Arm disarm RAS devices can be used to arm or disarm areas by a privileged user System programming LCD keypads allow a privileged user to make programming changes to the security system via the keypad interface User programming If a user with sufficient privilege accesses an LCD keypad a user can be added or edited directly from the keypad Monitoring Area alarms and access can be monitored using an LCD keypad Open door RAS devices can provide access capability Typical uses include entering a PIN code on a keypad or badging a card reader in order to open a door Programming The following programming options are available for RAS devices RAS number Range 1 to 16 Specify which RAS is being programmed same as the system bus address The first RAS device address on the system bus must be an LCD keypad The DIP switch setting applied to the device will be one less then the assigned address For example RAS address 1 would require setting the DIP switches to zero 1 1 0 Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Area alarm group Range 1 to 138 The area alarm gro
117. ailable for wireless DGP devices DGP number Range 1 to 15 Specify the DGP address that this wireless DGP will use in the Alliance system This should be the same as the address specified in DGP programming for this controller see DGP number on page 122 Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software DGP mode Specify the number of zones the DGP supports and consequently the number of DGP addresses the DGP takes up in the system DGP modes include the following Standard 29 zones Provides 29 wireless zones and consumes two DGP addresses Zones 1 2 and 3 are used to transmit up to 29 device tamper supervision fail and battery low events as a single global event Chapter 6 133 DGP programming features Standard 13 zones Provides 13 wireless zones and consumes one DGP address Zones 1 2 and 3 are used to transmit up to 13 device tamper supervision fail and battery low events as a single global event Extended 32 zones Provides 32 wireless zones and consumes two DGP addresses Enables all 32 zones with device tamper supervision fail and battery low events to be handled transparently by protocol Extended 16 zones Provides 16 wireless zones and consumes one DGP address Enables all 16 zones with device tamper supervision fail and battery low events to be handled transparently by protocol Supervision time Range
118. al Example 3 Although the system will support up to 15 DGP devices the maximum number for your system will depend on the number of expansion modules you add to the control panel and DGP devices If you add an expansion module to the control panel and to every DGP device on your system the system will only support 7 DGP devices As shown in Table 52 the control panel will consume addresses 0 1 and the 7 DGP devices will consume addresses 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 and 14 15 This in turn will limit the actual number of zones relays available for your system Any of the 16 zone numbers assigned to an address that are not used by the device consuming that address are not available for use by any other device Table 52 Example 3 Address Zones 2 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 3 48 90 511 52 93 34 58 99 6 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 7 115 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 10 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 D 177 178 179 180 181 182 185 184 14 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 15 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 Appendix D Numbering 4 door elevator controller A maximum of 48 doors are supported by the Alliance system This means that although you can have up to 15 DGP devices of different types comb
119. al disarm Areas specified for total disarm will bypass all of their zones when disarmed including zones that are not disarmed normally such as 24 hour zones Tamper alarms still function for all zones regardless of whether or not the zone is included in an area specified for total disarm For example Zone 6 a motion sensor in a room is programmed as a 24 hour zone type and is assigned to areas 1 and 16 Area 16 is programmed for total disarm in system options When servicing the room where the sensor is located area 16 will be disarmed Zone 6 will be disarmed because it is a part of area 16 Table 31 shows the state of zone 6 in response to the arm and disarm states of the areas it belongs to in the example above Table 31 Zone behavior for example Area 1 state Area 16 state Zone 6 behavior 24 hour zone Armed Armed Normal operation Disarmed Armed Normal operation Armed Disarmed Zone disabled except for tamper Disarmed Disarmed Zone disabled except for tamper Chapter 15 253 Miscellaneous programming features Film low Range 0 to 9999 Specify the film low frame count for the system When the film frame count for system still video or still photo cameras is reached the system will report a film low warning to the central station Film out Range 0 to 9999 Specify the film out frame count When the film out frame count for system still video or still photo cameras is reached the syst
120. allow users to exit without using the door reader Shunt A shunt is a procedure that automatically stops a zone input from generating an alarm when it is activated Soft time zone Soft time zones are event based time zones They are also referred to as a time zone to follow output System bus The system bus connects DGPs data gathering panels and RAS remote arming stations to the Alliance control panel Tamper Tampers are situations where a zone input RAS DGP control panel or associated wiring are tampered with or accidentally damaged The tamper feature activates a signal when a tamper alarm occurs 363 364 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 58 Alliance Builder terms explained continued Term Definition Text variable Numbers used in conjunction with text words A series of text words and text variables can be used to form phrases such as Building 6 Area 4 Room 1 Text word Text words are words or phrases contained in the database and associated with a number from 1 through 999 Text words in the 1 899 range are predefined in the word library Text words in the 900 999 range are user defined and added to the word library Time zone Atime zone is a program setting which identifies specific time periods on specific days Time zones are allocated to functions to control the activity of the function by time and day and are primarily used to restrict access See also Soft time zone and
121. allows unique hard soft time zone assignment User assignment Door floor groups are assigned to users in order to grant access Failure to assign a user any door floor groups would result in the user being unable to access any doors floors Furthermore an invalid time zone would also deny access 158 Alliance Builder User Manual Programming The following programming options are available for door floor groups Door floor group number Range 1 to 128 without memory expansion the range is 1 to 10 Specify which door floor group is being programmed Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Doors floors Specify the following Door floor number The assigned system bus RAS range 1 to 16 intelligent door range 17 to 64 or floor range 1 to 64 address number Door floor description The door floor description taken from either the RAS device or door floor programming sections Time zone Specifies the time period access will be granted for this door floor The range is 1 to 41 Note Note Only system RAS devices 1 to 16 can be assigned a soft time zone range 26 to 41 Floors cannot be assigned a soft time zone Time zone description Programmed in Hard time zone Description on page 227 or Soft time zone Description on page 234 Chapter 8 Control panel programming features This chapter provides an
122. amming Area links support the ability to tie several areas together to create a common area This will impact how the system handles arming and disarming as described below Arming The common area will only arm when all linked areas have been armed Disarming The common area will disarm when any linked area is disarmed For example area 1 is defined as the common area and is linked to areas 2 3 and 4 When any of the linked areas 2 3 or 4 are disarmed area 1 common is disarmed When all three linked areas are armed the shared area will also be armed Each area will continue to have its own entry exit times programmed in Area programming regardless of the programmed area links Common area number Range 1 to 16 Specify the common area number Link to area Specify the areas that should be linked to the common area Chapter 9 185 Access programming features Bank vault areas Bank vault areas are areas designated for high security requirements By specifying which of the 16 areas should be promoted to bank areas the system will automatically arm all other bank vault areas after a preset delay The delay time is based on the alarm group restriction timer and will only start when all bank vault areas are armed For example a building has three office areas areas 3 4 and 5 along with two common areas areas 1 and 2 The desired end result is to arm the common areas at a specified time after the last office area is
123. an alarm if the area is armed Example Panic alarm button Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hour zone flag Armed flags none 2 Armed alarm Generates an alarm when the area is armed Does not generate an alarm when the area is disarmed Example Internal door PIR motion detector Disarmed flags none Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 3 Entry exit alarm Does not generate an alarm when the area is disarmed When the area is armed the exit timer starts and activating the zone will not generate an alarm If the zone is activated and the exit time has expired the entry timer starts When the entry time has expired an alarm will be generated The zone must be closed when arming the area Example Final exit door Programming Program the entry exit time in Area programming and enable the buzzers in RAS programming Disarmed flags none Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag Table 57 Zone types continued Appendix F Zone types Number and name Description 4 Access zone Generates an alarm when the area is armed Does not generate an alarm when the area is disarmed The zone is bypassed during the entry exit timed periods The zone must be closed when arming the area Example PIR within the area s designated entry exit route Programming Program the entry exit time in Area programming and enable the buzzers in RAS programming Disarmed flags none Armed flags siren
124. ansion When adding a relay expansion module to the 4 door elevator controller it is important that the 4 door elevator controller be programmed for relay expansion modules when the module is clocked and not enabled when the relay expansion module is not clocked You cannot install both clocked and non clocked modules on the same 4 door elevator controller For example the AL 1810 is a four relay expansion module that is not clocked When this unit is installed on a 4 door controller the controller should not have the relay expansion modules programmed This configuration provides four additional relays in addition to the four on board relays of the controller This configuration is physically relay one through eight with the first four actually on the controller If the relay expansion module is enabled through the 4 door controller programming it will not function properly and will continuously cycle the relays with noticeable chatter When installing a clocked relay expansion module the controller must be programmed with the number of relays installed In the case of an AL 1813 8 relay expansion module the physical relays will map over the controllers four on board relays Any action that can cause the relay to become active will duplicate on the first four relays For example if the controllers on board relay 1 becomes active then relay 1 on the AL 1813 also becomes active Appendix D 331 Numbering Door card reader numbering The 4 d
125. areas without using the ON OFF keus Disabled Normal alarm control This option assumes the RAS device is a card reader The card s user alarm group and the RAS device s card reader s alarm group must both allow arm disarm functions in order for this function to work Reset without code Enabled Allows users to reset alarms by pressing ENTER ENTER 0 ENTER on the keypad The areas in alarm have to be assigned to the RAS alarm group Disabled Reset can only occur by entering the user PIN code and navigating through the menu on the keypad This option assumes the RAS device is an LCD keypad Restrict alarm group restriction to disarm Enabled Users with alarm group restrictions can only disarm or delay automatic arming It cannot be used for alarm group restrictions with arm and reset Disabled There is no restriction Use entry exit buzzer Enabled The RAS device buzzer sounds when the entry exit timers associated with the area assigned to the RAS device start Disabled The RAS buzzer will not sound when the entry exit timers start The entry time must be over 10 seconds Timed lockout on wrong codes Enabled When an invalid code defined as five consecutive invalid entries is entered the RAS device will lockout for 90 seconds Disabled The RAS device is available after an invalid code is entered 118 Alliance Builder User Manual Card arms after 3 badges Enabled Allow the user to
126. arm triggered by a hold up button Normally it will not trigger a siren only send a message to a central station Installer Installer refers to the company that installs and services security equipment IUM memory Intelligent User Module A 4 or 8 MB memory expansion module for a control panel and associated with intelligent DGPs data gathering panels 361 362 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 58 Alliance Builder terms explained continued Term Definition Keypad A keypad is a RAS remote arming station with keys to input data used to program the control panel perform user functions and view alarms Keyswitch A keyswitch is a device using a switch with a key to arm or disarm areas LCD Liquid Crystal Display This is the part of a RAS remote arming station where messages or programming details are displayed LED Light Emitting Diode This is a light indicator on a RAS remote arming station which indicates a condition Local alarm A local alarm is transmitted only within a building and occurs when an area is occupied The circumstances which cause a local alarm can be checked and rectified by personnel on site and it is therefore unnecessary for the alarm to be transmitted to a central station Local bus The local bus connects devices both RAS and DGPs to a 4 Door Controller DGP These devices are not visible to the control panel Lock unlock doors A door can be locked or unlocked Un
127. armed To accomplish this you would e Promote areas 3 4 and 5 to bank vault areas e n Control panel options programming set Disable auto insert of alarm group restriction to disabled see System options on page 258 This will enable the bank vault areas feature The common area are linked to bank vault areas 3 4 and 5 This is programmed in Area links programming e Create an area group restriction in order to specify which common areas are included In Alarm Group Restriction programming enable areas 1 and 2 in the Timed disarm areas option see Timed disarmed areas on page 198 e To program the preset delay specify the Alarm group restriction disarmed time value in Timers programming see Alarm group restriction 1 to 7 disarmed time on page 172 The timer used is based on the alarm group restriction number used above e In order for this function to work properly the alarm group must include the areas assigned to the alarm group restriction areas 1 and 2 Programming The following programming options are available for bank vault areas Areas Range 1 to 16 Specify the areas to promote to bank vault areas 186 Alliance Builder User Manual Regions Regions are used in establishing boundaries within 4 door elevator controllers The system allows you to assign regions to both the IN and OUT readers on the 4 door elevator controller When a user is granted access at a door the user is assigned that particular
128. assigned zone will be logged to the printer as door open or door closed when the zone becomes active If print zone when active in Zone programming see Event flags on page 243 is enabled for the assigned zone a door open message is sent twice Disabled No reporting is logged to the printer Cancel door event Enabled When the assigned zone switches to the deactivated state the door unlock event and the shunt timer are cancelled Disabled When the assigned zone switches to the deactivated state the door unlock event and the shunt timer will continue to run for the programmed time 250 Alliance Builder User Manual Chapter 15 Miscellaneous programming features This chapter provides an overview of miscellaneous programming features Control panel ODORE cess ce AA Ne wd Custom LCD Message ise ecce ete ee ee EVER Fldgs 212 12 24 s nel Rem ehe was SVEM event MOOG Lice eee ee eee e e POM WOES ceai cee Les eI Bea M Bae OR ee Alliance Builder User Manual Control panel options System options are a collection of options that affect various functions in the system Due to the global nature of system options any system option that is set will affect all related functionality in the system For example if the bypass zone tamper option is enabled all zone tamper alarms in the entire system will be bypassed Programming The following programming is available for the control panel options Areas for tot
129. at indicates to the installer the purpose of the event flag for programming options To search the list for a particular event flag type in the event flag name or number in the appropriate search box and click Search To see how many event flag descriptions have been programmed see the minimum maximum and amount used in the status bar at the bottom of the tool 102 Alliance Builder User Manual Timers tool Use the Timers tool to program timers for the system Select the tab for the type of timer you want to program then use the up down buttons to set the time for each timer needed You can enter a value instead of using the up down buttons but if the value entered is outside the accepted range it will default to the maximum value within the range We recommend you always use the up down arrows to avoid programming errors Timers are accurate to 1 of the value entered therefore avoid programming values of 1 second or 1 minute If a timer is set to 0 it will not be used To get a brief description of each timer select a tab and mouse over the timer option Alarm group restriction timers Alarm group restriction timers determine the amount of time the associated areas will be disarmed After the specified amount of time has elapsed the area will automatically rearm If the time is left at zero for an alarm group restriction timer the associated area will not automatically rearm To set alarm group restriction timers do
130. ayed panic alarm button pressing a second delayed panic alarm button will override the delay Programming Program the delayed disarmed alarm time in Timers programming Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 9 Reset delayed Resets a delayed alarm type if the zone pulses to active and returns to its normal state Reset a delayed alarm type if the delay timer is running and a full alarm has not occurred Stops cameras from operating if the zone is activated but the delayed time continues to run Delayed zone types are 8 11 22 and 40 Example Reset button for quick cancellation of the delayed alarm Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 10 Do not use 11 Disarmed delayed alarm Generates an alarm when the area is disarmed but does not report it to the central station until the delayed alarm timer has expired or a second delayed alarm has activated Does not generate an alarm if the area is armed Example Delayed panic alarm button Programming Program the delayed disarmed alarm time in Timers programming Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags none 12 Restart exit timer A pulsed keyswitch that resets the entry timers and restarts the exit timers for all areas assigned to the zone Example Keyswitch near the final exit door Disarmed flags none Armed flags none Table 57 Zone typ
131. bers have changed Yellow Over half the attribute s maximum allowed number is used 50 maximum Red The attribute is nearing the maximum number allowed 90 maximum Black The attribute is at the maximum number allowed and cannot be expanded 100 maximum Icons Icons are used in Alliance Builder to indicate programming features The icons are used in the tool bars view tabs and property programming trees to give visual clues to what is being programmed and how the programming features interact in Alliance programming 18 Alliance Builder User Manual Property programming Property programming is accessed through property trees located in several areas of Alliance Builder Most property programming is done through the System bus layout tab for specific device properties and through the Control panel programming tab for project wide properties You can change the value of most properties However some properties are set automatically for you by Alliance Builder and cannot be changed When a property is selected a gray color indicates the property is read only and cannot be changed while a black color indicates a property that can be changed There are two lists of properties Alliance Builder properties Alliance Builder properties are not downloaded to the control panel These properties are defined by Alliance Builder and include the part number and the type of enclosure required This information drives the Required Allia
132. beta HUP sass Se 41 Templates x oe iia regi Rebbe Uere xa eb bid ced kde ees 42 Irmport APFarchlVe sinoni iae ea a EE ASA 43 System bus layout tab icon e NEE LE p RARE se E ERG RR Ee 44 Gontrol panel tab 2s eere eee a iia btt d tos 46 Add Re EE 47 Remove system devices 2 0 ccc ence ee ens 47 Add anceillatg devices cerca RR ce n Ep BA aa Dada E ERE 48 Rermove anecillar devices uc ete tret ate et b REOR Ne a me 49 View device properties 2 2 0 0 ccc cece cence nent ene teen e es 49 DIP SWitcIitaD8 au d aces o mere rusty eh EE repe eU a O 50 Change device properties d NN RSA dE de eme NNN UT biens 51 Add battery requirements to devices 00 0 cc cece cnet e ene eee ee 51 Add devices to a wireless DP 53 Add devices to a point D DP 54 Add cameras tod DMR 30 t ee vases PARA AR EE ERE RE E 56 Local bus layout TOD ccros ove Rr estos Ae Eeer 58 Add doors to a 4 door controller 0 0 cece cece teen eee teen tenes 59 Card readers and keypads 59 Program DGP Dropertes een 60 Program door proper reos cete leche RERO I ree eade d re ce 60 Add elevators to a 4 elevator controller 0 2 ccc eee cence eee e ees 60 Card readers and keypads 60 Program DGP properties 0 e cece cnn rr rr 61 Program door elevator properties oooooocooccocccccoococconcorrcnccnoos 61 Control panel programming tob eee eee nne 62 Programming features riiisg ccc rr E tence e 63 Selected programming field sisse a 66
133. box If you select Microsoft Excel file do the following 1 Inthe File browser dialog box indicate the location of the file you want to import and click Open 2 Click OK 3 Inthe Parts import mapping dialog box select the appropriate part number and description columns 4 Click OK The information from the source file is added to the parts tree and you can add it to the third party parts list Chapter 2 71 View tabs If you select Comma separated values text file CSV do the following 1 Click OK 2 Inthe File browser dialog box indicate the location of the file you want to import 3 Click OK 4 In the Parts import mapping dialog box select the appropriate part number and description columns 5 Click OK The information from the source file is added to the parts tree and you can now add it to the third party parts list If you select Windows clipboard copy paste do the following 1 Click OK All information on your PC clipboard will be copied Be sure only the appropriate text is on the clipboard 2 Inthe Parts import mapping dialog box select the appropriate part number and description columns 3 Click OK The information from your clipboard is added to the parts tree and you can add it to the third party parts list Organize the parts tree To make parts in the tree easier to find you can organize the parts in folders and subfolders However to add parts from the parts tree to the parts
134. cal support Online publication library Another great resource for assistance with your GE product is our online publication library available to all of our customers To access the library go to our website at the following location http www gesecurity com In the Tools area at the top click the Publication Library link After you register and log on you may search through our online library for the documentation you need 1 Many GE documents are provided as PDFs portable document format To read these documents you will need Adobe Acrobat Reader which can be downloaded free from Adobe s website at www adobe com Appendix A Boolean logic This appendix provides an overview of Boolean logic and examples of macros applied to Boolean logic 278 Alliance Builder User Manual Boolean logic A Boolean logic equation consists of three basic components inputs or operands operators and a result X The Alliance system applies Boolean logic to create macros Inputs operand An input in a logic equation can have only one of two possible values or states Some examples of the logical state of an operand is True or False Set or Clear Off or On 1 one or 0 zero Active or Inactive and Yes or No In the Alliance system for instance a zone alarm event flag is set or clear it is true if in alarm and false if not in alarm Result X output The result of the equation is based on the operations performed on the inp
135. card programming options include Com port Specify a Com port that has been designated as a card programmer port If no port has been designated identify a Com port Connection password A connection password is required to connect the card programmer so that unauthorized cards cannot be programmed This password can be any numeric password up to 10 characters in length Poll rate The poll rate allows you to specify how often Alliance will poll the card programmer We recommend a setting of 100 Activate programmer When you activate programmer you allow the programmer to operate Master overwrite password This password can be any numeric password up to 10 characters in length and is blank by default This password is required in the following situations When a new card for a user is created and that user already has a card issued When a request is made to rewrite data to a card that already has data This password can only be changed by operators with the correct security access The connection and master passwords are stored in the card programmer and although initially blank will after programming require the existing password to program a new password 300 Alliance Builder User Manual Reader configuration cards Reader configuration cards allow an operator to specify the access settings needed for the readers and write all the necessary data to one particular card The operator can then move around the building ba
136. central station Disabled No report is sent to the specified central station The selected central station corresponds to Central station programming For example enabling central station 1 would result in the system sending a report to central station number 1 Enable engineer reset for alarms Enabled Engineer reset is enabled for all alarms in this zone For example when enabled the user cannot arm the areas belonging to the zone until an engineer reset has been performed Disabled No engineer reset Note An engineer reset may be performed through programming menu 51 on an LCD keypad Enable engineer reset for tamper alarms Enabled Engineer reset is enabled for tamper alarms in this zone For example when enabled the user cannot arm the areas belonging to the zone until an engineer reset has been performed Disabled No engineer reset Note An engineer reset may be performed through programming menu 51 on an LCD keypad Disable bypass Enabled A user cannot bypass this zone Disabled A user can bypass this zone Zone channel Not Supported 246 Alliance Builder User Manual Zone shunts A zone shunt will bypass a zone for a specified period of time when the zone is in the active state When a zone associated with a zone shunt becomes active or when the programmed output is active a timer is started As long as the timer is running the zone will not cause an alarm to be generated Durin
137. ch door can directly access up to four onboard zones on the 4 door controller These zones will typically be used to support the controller s intelligent features Up to four reader devices Each door is comprised of one to four reader devices depending on required functionality Shunt support Each door supports one of several zone shunt options Region control Each door supports region control through antipassback Hardware timers Each door provides several dedicated timers for use with shunts door unlocking and extended access Request to exit RTE Each door supports a dedicated RTE function Alarm control An alarm group is assigned to each door defining arm disarm behavior 139 140 Alliance Builder User Manual Advanced reader support Each door supports numerous different reader types such as Wiegand and Alliance smart card The same holds true for card formats Each door also provides numerous LED options Keypad reader interface The 4 door controller has its own local bus supporting the full range of RAS devices In addition the 4 door controller also provides four reader ports which can directly interface with Wiegand readers or Alliance readers therefore it is not necessary to equip each reader with AL 1170 interface boards Door open too long DOTL Each door supports a DOTL function Chapter 7 141 Door programming features Door access programming The following door access programming options are a
138. co rere ete exem ee hne e eee her I OE a 308 leie EEN 323 Nu mbetilg conos RR RR e Ru RE CET PERPE ELE RR UE ERE EE E Rd 324 d ed 324 4 door elevator controller se 329 RAS le le EE 332 Zone event reporting cece cece eee eee eee eee 333 ZONE event reporting de cese ere bru ERO Ve E eae dee D ECH KEN 334 CONG TUDES sis aiii dedii db d dudo as 343 Zone TYPES AN ANNER Ra eae EE ENNEN OVI TG ERE REG Va E SG epu ew RO ie Ze 344 CECT Tre eee ee ek EE 359 NV xvi Alliance Builder User Manual Preface This is the GE Alliance Builder User Manual This document includes an overview of the product and detailed instructions explaining e how to use the user interface and e what the programming features are There is also information describing how to contact technical support if you have questions or concerns To use this document effectively you should have the following minimum qualifications abasic knowledge of the Alliance system components and abasic knowledge of programming access and intrusion control panels Read these instructions and all ancillary documentation entirely before installing or operating this product The most current versions of this and related documentation may be found on our website Alliance Builder User Manual Conventions used in this document The following conventions are used in this document Bold Menu items and buttons Italic Emphasis of an instruction or point special terms
139. connects to the control panel or a DGP data gathering panel to provide relay or open collector outputs When programming 1 output controller equals 8 outputs PIN A PIN code is a 4 to 10 digit number given to or selected by a user It is necessary to enter a PIN code on an Alliance keypad as a prerequisite to perform most functions in programming the PIN code is associated with a user number which identifies the PIN code holder to the system PIR detector Passive Infrared detector This security device is used to detect intruders in a certain part of an area or premise using infrared detection Poll A poll is an inquiry message continually sent by the control panel to DGPs data gathering panels and RAS remote arming stations Polling allows the remote unit to transfer data to the control panel RAS Remote Arming Station A RAS is the user s control panel for security functions for areas or for access points doors The RAS can be a console LCD keypad reader or any other device that can be used to perform security functions such as arm disarm open doors etc Reader A reader is a device used for access control that can read cards to allow access Depending on the needs and the type of cards the reader can be a magnetic swipe reader or a proximity reader RTE zone Request to Exit zone This is a zone that is programmed to activate a door event flag such as a button provided inside a door to
140. control panels and 4 door elevator controllers Where systems include both both must have the same memory configuration Each type of memory configuration has limitations on users and user types There are also software IUM options only available with firmware versions F and above Table 48 shows the limitations for each type of memory configuration Table 48 Memory configuration limitations 1MB 1MB expansion expansion 4 MB 8 MB Standard softwarelUM module IUM module IUM module Users with cards 50 2000 2000 17873 65535 Users with names 50 200 200 200 200 Users with PINs 50 2000 1000 1000 1000 Alarm events 250 1000 1000 1000 1000 Access events 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 Alarm groups 74 138 138 138 138 Floor group 10 128 128 128 128 Door groups 10 128 128 128 128 304 Alliance Builder User Manual Users The database related to a user includes the following User number 1 to 65 535 e User name 16 characters e Alarm group 0 to 138 e Door group 0 to 128 e Floor group 1 to 64 e PIN 4 to 10 digit sequence e Contact details e Check boxes for Card only Extended access Trace and Privileged e Smart card options The user database contains the following fields User number The user number is a value between 1 and 65 535 and is used by the system to link a PIN or card to the functions it will do and the doors it can enter When programming cards the ID n
141. ct a part on the parts list you can only remove one part number at a time and hit the Delete key on your keyboard e Or change the value in the Quantity required column to 0 To remove required GE parts do one of the following e Remove the device in the System bus layout tab Alliance Builder automatically updates the parts list to reflect changes to the system layout e Or right click the required check box to remove the check from the box and then hit the Delete key on your keyboard e Or change the value in the Quantity required column to 0 Third party parts list The Third party parts list tab provides a list of parts with the following information e Part number e Description of the part e Quantity required The left pane interface is used to store imported parts in a parts tree Figure 23 that can be added to the parts list The left pane also allows you to import part files organize and edit the parts tree 70 Alliance Builder User Manual Figure 23 Third party parts tree g 3rd Party Parts List C3 Imported Parts L1 E Organize 3rd party parts Import 3rd party parts Edit 3rd party parts Selected Information Selected Part Import third party parts You can add parts to the parts tree by importing Excel files text files CSV or clipboard text from your PC To import the file or text click Import Third party parts Figure 23 Select the source for the parts in the Import Third party parts dialog
142. d The system will detect if the line voltage on the ISDN network is within limits If not a telephone line fault condition will be activated Disabled Line fault monitoring is disabled This option should only be used for ISDN connections 200 Baud reverse area armed disarmed Enabled Disarm events are reported as type R and arm events are reported as type A Disabled Disarm events are reported as type A and arm events are reported as type R Report AC fault Enabled Should be enabled for all countries except Ireland Disabled By default for Ireland This option is ignored if the enable buzzer on AC line fault option is enabled in Control panel options programming see System options on page 258 220 Alliance Builder User Manual Report line fault Enabled Should be enabled for all countries except Ireland Disabled By default for Ireland This option is ignored if the enable buzzer on AC line fault option is enabled in Control panel options programming see System options on page 258 Enable GSM line fault monitoring Hardware is not yet available for this option SIA area modifier Enabled The area modifier code packet will be added to the SIA transmission This allows the user to send to multiple areas using the same amount of code Disabled The area modifier code packet will not be added to the SIA transmission Chapter 12 221 Reporting programming features Reporting cla
143. d in relation to a zone input device the zone device is activated For example an emergency exit door is open Alarm The state of a security system when an armed zone device is activated For example a PIR device has detected an intruder causing a siren to sound Alarm control The control of alarm functions Alarm group Alarm groups are assigned to users RAS devices or door readers to define what areas can be controlled and what functions can be done by that user from that device and during what times An alarm group can also be assigned to certain zone types Alarm group restriction An alarm group restriction can be assigned to an alarm group to enable different types of users to use the timed disarmed function on certain areas restrict alarm control to arm reset only on certain areas or to use the user count or emergency functions Alarm reporting A procedure to transmit alarm or other events to a central station by means of a dialer and a set of rules called a protocol Area A section of a building that has specific security requirements The control panel allows a building to be divided into 16 areas of differing security requirements Each area is identified with a number and a name Armed The condition of a zone an area or a building when a change of the status of any zone will cause an alarm An area or building is armed only when it is unoccupied while some zones may remain armed continual
144. d the same identifier already exists in the database and will ask if the existing project should be replaced with the newer one Project archive file The following files are contained in an Alliance Builder project archive Alliance Builder Details all the project definitions that identify the part numbers enclosure assignments etc Panel defs Control panel programming configuration Parts list Exporting process Use the Export tool see Export tool on page 90 to export a project to an archive file or to Alliance Professional Importing process To import projects do the following 1 From the Project list tab see Project list tab on page 36 click Import APF archive at the bottom of the tab You can also use the menu bar Menu bar on page 34 to select File New project In the New project selection window select Import APF archive and click OK 2 Browse to select the system configuration file you want to import 3 Click Open You can not have two projects in Alliance Builder with the same project ID If you try to import a project and the project ID already exists in Alliance Builder a warning box will appear Chapter 1 29 Introduction Recommended import export strategy To avoid adding programming time to the process we recommend you follow these steps 1 Ein dee Y Design the entire project in Alliance Builder Export the project to an Alliance software management program Use the software manageme
145. d to Securitel If X25 Enai format is selected the panel will automatically assume that the connection type is ISDN D channel The difference between Small reporting and Large reporting is the amount of system events that will be reported The Large formats will report most system events while the Small formats will report summarized events Connection type Define what physical medium is used to call the central station Options include PSTN Uses the on board dialer to make the call ISDN Uses the AL 7100 plug in dialer device to make call GSM Hardware is not yet available Use Bell 103 protocol Enable to use the Bell 103 modem tones for the PSTN ISDN analog line connection Dual reporting If enabled an acknowledgement should be received from both central station telephone numbers If disabled the first acknowledgement received will close down the dialer unless there are more reports pending commonly referred to as alternate reporting Disable reporting bypasses If enabled bypasses are not reported If disabled they will be reported XSIA max characters 16 off 30 on Enable to specify the maximum number of XSIA characters is 30 otherwise the maximum is 16 Chapter 12 217 Reporting programming features Suppress FTC for voice reporting Enable to suppress the Report Fail FTC message and fault LED on the RAS This option is only applicable if voice reporting is the selected protocol X25 account code
146. dd this information in the System layout tab click Calculate on the Battery calculation tab to start the battery calculation The following system battery requirements will be calculated and shown in the System battery requirements field e Standby Amp hours Alarm Amp hours e Active Amp hours e Minimum battery power required e Total standby battery power required e Battery derating factor If you have more than one control panel in your project use the Control panel address drop down menu to select the control panel and the battery information for that control panel will populate the window The System devices field outlines all power source devices contained in the selected control panel Select a device on this tree and all devices drawing power from the selected device are outlined in the Ancillary devices field The Power sources field includes the following information for all power source devices e Description Hours in standby e Minutes in alarm e Seconds in alarm 76 Alliance Builder User Manual The Power sink objects field lists the following information for all devices drawing power e Description e Duty cycle e Standby current mA e Alarm current mA e Active current mA All fields in the Battery calculation tab are read only Use this tab to check the results of the battery calculation and to determine if any devices need to be redistributed To make any needed changes you must go System bus layout
147. dging at readers that need to be programmed This will default each reader to the information settings stored on the configuration card The information on the card can also be read back and rewritten to allow your settings to be changed when necessary Factory set default settings are also available Reader settings include Valid card beep Sound one beep when a valid card is badged in addition to other beeps that will sound due to control panel operation such as four beeps for a valid card Watchdog Transmit a watchdog data stream when in offline mode when no valid card is present Read option card The smart card reader can be set up using a configuration option card To disable changing the configuration more than once with a configuration card Disable this option Online blue LED options The setting of the blue LED operation when online can be changed between Door open only and Disarmed plus door open Online red LED options The setting of the red LED operation when online can be changed between Armed and Armed plus door open Offline LED options When offline the LEDs can be controlled using a one wire or two wire operation Valid card LED flash Allows the blue LED to give a short flash when a valid card is badged on during credit transactions Night light Allows the blue LED to partially light up to show directions in a dark room When the red or blue LED is active the night light will be off Reader address Set
148. do the following 1 Select an installer name from the list Click Edit Change the existing information in the New edit installer window Click OK The new information will show in the installers list Si We op a Click Close to exit the tool Remove installers All installers can be removed from the system except Alliance Installer This ensures that the system always has a default installer Before removing an installer you must use the Project management tab to reassign any projects for that installer Alliance Builder will not allow you to remove an installer that has assigned projects but will provide a warning notice to alert you to the situation To remove an existing installer do the following 1 Select an installer name from the list 2 Click Remove 3 When the confirmation box appears reconfirm the removal 4 Click Close to exit the tool Chapter 3 87 Alliance Builder tools Installer types tab Select the Installer types tab to add edit or remove installer types The tab provides a list of all existing installer types Add installer types To add installer types do the following 1 2 Click Add Enter the name for the new installer type The name must be in 5 to 16 alphanumeric characters long Select the permissions and functions you want to give this installer type Click OK The new installer type will be added to the installer type list and be available for selection when new installers ar
149. duress feature allows the user to signal a central station that a duress situation is occurring by entering a duress digit in conjunction with a PIN code Enable disable doors By default a door is enabled When a card is badged on a reader associated with the door the door will open When disabled the reader will not react to a card being badged and the door will not open Event flags Event flags are signals activated by a zone input condition area condition system status or fault condition The main purpose of an event flag is to activate an output Event to output Event to output creates links between event flags and outputs Outputs are available as relays or as open collector outputs Facility A facility is a grouping of database records typically used to indicate a building location or function Forced arm Forced arming is arming with automatic bypass on any zone that is active Hard time zone Hard time zones are clocked based and are valid between programmed start and end times Hard time zones are allocated to control panel functions to control the activity of that function by time and day and are primarily used to restrict access or to automatically arm disarm areas History History in this instance refers to a list of past alarm and access control events stored in memory that can be viewed on an LCD arming station RAS or sent to a printer Hold up Hold up refers to a silent al
150. e 1 to 12 Specify the DGP bus address This should be the same as the address specified in DGP programming for this controller see DGP number on page 122 Description Specify a 40 character text description of the DGP The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Output controllers Range 0 to 32 Specify the number of non clocked not driven by a clock on the control panel output controllers connected to the controller The controller can only access the first 16 relays Chapter 6 125 DGP programming features while the system can access relays that go beyond the first 16 For example if a controller has four 8 way relay expansion boards attached the controller can access logical relays 1 to 16 but the rest of the system can access logical relays 17 to 32 Number of prefix digits Range 0 to 4 This value should mirror the Number of prefix digits on page 254 Poll RAS Specify which local bus RAS devices should be polled by the controller Refer to Table 6 Door RAS numbering on page 123 for more information on how to identify RAS devices on the controller LCD RAS fitted Specify which local bus RAS devices are LCD keypads Refer to Table 6 Door RAS numbering on page 123 for more information on how to identify RAS devices on the controller RAS RTE zone Specify which local bus RAS devices support RTE request to exit and require the button to be wired to the RTE IN
151. e Up to 16 characters Specify the name of the alarm group The name is converted into a system text word and is subsequently transferred to the control panel As a result the name will appear within RAS keypad devices Since the system only allows up to 100 user defined text words try to reuse existing text words in the text word library see Text word library on page 308 Description Specify a 40 character text description of the alarm group The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Areas Range 1 to 16 Specify the areas where the alarm group will have alarm control Time zone Range 0 to 64 includes both soft and hard time zones Specify the day time the alarm group is valid 192 Alliance Builder User Manual Alternate alarm group Range 1 to 138 When the system is performing some functionality that depends on a valid alarm group the control panel will resort to the alternate alarm group if the alarm group s time zone is invalid The system will go two levels deep For example the system would check the validity of the primary alarm group then its alternate alarm group and ultimately the alternate s alternate alarm group Alarm group options Chapter 10 193 Alarm control programming features User alarm group Enabled The alarm group is assigned to users Disabled The alarm group is assigned to RAS devices Alarm system control Enabled Allows
152. e Alliance system A RAS device can be used to Display zone system and area status e Specify the areas that can be accessed by the user e Handle basic user access via a PIN e Assign addresses to control panels e Provide programming via menus e Provide specialized programming functions For more information on RAS programming options see RAS remote arming stations on page 112 RAS addressing Most RAS devices have DIP switches that are used to set the RAS address on the RAS device Be aware that although the control panel supports up to 16 RAS devices on the system bus and the system RAS address range is 1 to 16 the DIP switch address setting on the RAS device will be 0 to 15 You must subtract 1 from the system RAS address to get the correct DIP switch setting for the RAS device For example the first RAS device added to the system bus will be RAS 1 with a DIP switch setting of address 0 For more information on RAS addressing and numbering see Numbering on page 324 32 Alliance Builder User Manual DGP data gathering panels A DGP depending on the device type can provide expansion capabilities redundant databases access control zone monitoring siren notification and many other features DGP devices connect to the control panel through the RS485 system bus This system bus can extend up to a distance of 5 000 feet from the control panel allowing the installer to distribute the system over a large area when needed
153. e Second alternate Timed disarm area 2 1 Arm reset area 2 Alarm group 31 is assigned to user 1 When time zone 1 is valid User 1 will have alarm group 31 with alarm group restriction 4 The user has full control over area 1 and can arm reset area 2 When time zone 1 is invalid but time zone 2 is valid User 1 will have the first alternate alarm group with alarm group restriction 4 The user has full control over area 1 and timed disarm for area 2 When time zone 1 and time zone 2 are invalid User 1 will have the second alternate alarm group with alarm group restriction 4 The user has timed disarm for area 1 and no control over area 2 Chapter 10 201 Alarm control programming features Automatic arm disarm This feature allows you to arm disarm programmed areas at specified times This works When the programmed time becomes valid the system will disarm all areas assigned to the programmed alarm group When the programmed time is about to become invalid all keypad buzzers will intermittently sound their warning buzzer user may postpone the arming time by either entering their PIN or badging their card during the warning time When the programmed time becomes invalid the exit timer starts and all areas assigned to the programmed alarm group are armed Up to four off and on times may be programmed per time zone but you cannot have a time zone disarm before midnight and rearm after midnight If this is requ
154. e added Click Close to exit the tool Edit installer types You cannot change or edit the Alliance Installer type The permissions and functions for this installer type are set by Alliance Builder If you edit an installer type that has already been assigned to active installers those installers will be affected by the changes to the installer type the next time they use Alliance Builder To change information for an existing installer type do the following 1 Ue ue p Fa Select the installer type from the installer types list Click Edit Change the existing information for the installer type Click OK Click Close to exit the tool Remove installer types The Alliance Installer type cannot be removed This ensures that the system always has a default installer type 88 Alliance Builder User Manual You cannot remove an installer type that has been associated with installers The installers must be removed or their installer type changed before the installer type can be removed If you attempt to remove an associated installer type Alliance Builder will provide a warning notice to alert you to the situation To remove an existing installer type do the following 1 Select an installer type from the list 2 Click Remove 3 When the confirmation box appears reconfirm the removal 4 Click Close to exit the tool Project management tab Use the Project management tab to manage all projects that your permi
155. e device address is 1 the associated relay number for the device is 33 Example 2 The point ID DGP system address is set to 3 and the device is assigned point ID device address 4 Since the DGP 3 zone range is 49 to 64 and the device address is 4 the associated relay number for the device will be 52 Memory locations For point ID IO devices nine memory locations are provided for additional programming Binary values are assigned to the locations to program the following options e Output relay programming e Zone types e Output relay supervision e EOL value Number of inputs zones and or number of output relays Refer to the installation manual for the point ID DGP for details on programming memory locations 132 Alliance Builder User Manual Wireless DGP The wireless DGP provides wireless zones and fobs as well as standard DGP functions Each DGP can support up to 32 zones and up to 16 fob sensors Zone sensors can be anything from glassbreak detectors to PIR devices while key fobs are tied to user or relay numbers and provide on off or arm disarm facilities such as panic buttons Every wireless device is assigned a unique serial number during manufacturing The serial number can be found on the box label for the device Once the serial number has been entered into the system up to four zones will be assigned to the device Supervision options are also available Programming The following programming options are av
156. e directory link Other information such as the installer name the dates the project was created and last modified and the project ID can not be changed Customer information All of the customer information can be changed including the customer name telephone number and address Component summary Provides a list of all components in the project This component summary is a reflection of the projects system layout and can not be changed in this window Firmware Provides information on the control panel firmware version To change the version information use the drop down menu You can also use the Click to view bus thumbnail link to see the system layout graphic for the project Create new projects Chapter 2 View tabs We recommend that you create projects using the Create from template on page 41 option If however you want to create a new project without using a template click Create new project This accesses the Alliance Builder wizard Use the Back Next and Cancel buttons at the bottom of the wizard window to navigate through the steps in Table 3 Table 3 New project wizard Welcome Click Next Software platform Select a software platform from the drop down list The part number description and attribute list are provided for the selected item Use this information to ensure that the selected software platform is appropriate for your project Click Next Project name and folder Enter a name
157. e elevator controls and the times the floors can be disarmed without using a valid card or PIN at the elevator reader Security zone number Specify the zone number that will control the elevator security group The zones monitor floor selected option must be disabled if the security group zone is used Elevator security group Specify a floor group number Each floor group is programmed with floors and a time zone The elevator override group determines the floors that may be freely accessed in the elevator controls and the times that the floors may be accessed provided the security group zone is switched on Total floors Specify the number of floors available for this 4 elevator controller Chapter 6 129 DGP programming features Point ID DGP The point ID DGP controls addressable point ID devices Although similar to a control panel the point ID DGP is programmed as a DGP data gathering panel As such the system requires that you add the DGP to the system in DGP programming All other point ID specific programming options are covered in this section Once the DGP is added to the system you can add configure point ID devices through point ID device programming Point ID devices have onboard DIP switches used to assign a point ID address The combination of DGP point ID address results in a physical zone number see Numbering on page 324 in the Alliance system In addition the DGP has a learn mode used to automatically obtain d
158. e following types of DGP devices Standard DGP Supports standard DGP options such as zone relay expansion 4 door controller DGP The 4 door controller DGP is a specialized device for providing intelligent door control in the system Each 4 door controller can control four doors each with two IN readers and two OUT readers The 4 door controller is intelligent in that it contains a sub set of the control panel database with all of the user s access rights for the doors it controls If the control panel should stop functioning for any reason the 4 door controller would continue to provide access and logging The 4 door controller does not provide any zone expansion capabilities See 4 door elevator controllers on page 123 4 elevator controller DGP The 4 elevator controller DGP is similar to the 4 door controller with the addition of elevator control for the system See 4 door elevator controllers on page 123 Wireless DGP A wireless DGP is similar to a standard DGP except the devices controlled by the DGP are wireless devices See Wireless DGP on page 132 Point ID DGP A point ID DGP is similar to a standard DGP except the devices controlled by the DGP are addressed See Point ID DGP on page 129 Chapter 6 121 DGP programming features Functions DGP devices can be used for the following functions Polled by control panel The control panel will communicate with the DGP device over the system bus in order to gather status informati
159. e programming details such as e Zone names e Relay names e Door names e Address and programming DIP switch settings You can also access wiring diagrams for all devices in your project by using the As built tool From the As built tool you can choose to print the wiring diagrams in high or low resolution and you can request a zone relay and or door index View wiring diagrams You can only view one diagram at a time Use the device tree in the left pane to select a device and the diagram for that device will appear Only devices that are included in the system layout will be available in the device tree Save wiring diagrams as images To save a wiring diagram as an image right click the device in the tree in the left pane and select Save diagram to image Use the Save as box to select the type of image you want Jpeg Bitmap GIF or Png and browse to the folder where you want the image saved Print wiring diagrams To print the wiring diagrams you must use the As built tool on page 81 Chapter 2 75 View tabs Battery calculation tab Use the Battery calculation tab to calculate the backup battery requirements for your project Before doing the calculation you must use the System layout tab to specify the following information for each device in your project containing a power supply e The required number of hours in standby e The required number of minutes in alarm e The required number of seconds in active After you a
160. e the delay Programming Program the delayed disarmed alarm time in Timers programming Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 23 Camera 1 count Used to increment the film counter for camera 1 by connecting a normally open contact across the zone The counter increments if the zone switches from open to short This zone can only be used on the Alliance control panel Disarmed flags none Armed flags none Table 57 Zone types continued Number and name Description 24 Camera 2 count Appendix F Zone types Used to increment the film counter for camera 2 by connecting a normally open contact across the zone The counter increments if the zone switches from open to short This zone can only be used on the Alliance control panel Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 25 Camera 3 count Used to increment the film counter for camera 3 by connecting a normally open contact across the zone The counter increments if the zone switches from open to short This zone can only be used on the Alliance control panel Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 26 Camera 4 count Used to increment the film counter for camera 4 by connecting a normally open contact across the zone The counter increments if the zone switches from open to short This zone can only be used on the Alliance control panel Disarmed flags none Armed flags
161. e time of day in hours and minutes when the battery test will start Run time Range 2 to 255 minutes Specify the time period that the battery test will run Test on holiday If enabled the battery test will be conducted on holidays This implies that the test will likely occur outside the bounds of the specified frequency Chapter 11 207 Diagnostics programming features Clock correction This option allows you to program a correction factor that compensates for a control panel clock that may be running slightly fast or slow Programming The following programming options are available for the clock correction feature Clock correction Range 119 to 199 seconds per day Specify the amount of time to compensate a control panel per day Daylight savings start month Range January through December Specify the month that daylight savings time begins Daylight savings end month Range January through December Specify the month that daylight savings time ends Start daylight savings Range See daylight savings start end table Specifies the Sunday of the month when daylight savings time begins End daylight savings Range See daylight savings start end table Specify the Sunday of the month when daylight savings time ends 208 Alliance Builder User Manual Daylight savings start end table Table describes the daylight savings time start end choices Table 22 Daylight savings start end Option Description
162. e to reflect the device s address number on the system or local bus When a device is added to the system layout Alliance Builder automatically assigns an address to the device and sets the graphic on this tab to reflect that number You can not change this graphic or the device number in the Alliance Builder properties list and you must manually set the DIP switches on the device to match the graphic in Alliance Builder Programming DIP tab Some Alliance devices have programming DIP switches that can be set based on the required functionality of the device or other devices connected to the device Some device programming DIP switches will be automatically set for a device based on system logic To change a device s programming DIP switch settings change the related property in the device properties list The programming DIP switch graphic will change to reflect the programming in the device properties list You must manually set the DIP switches on the device to match the graphic in Alliance Builder Chapter 2 51 View tabs Change device properties You can change the value of most device properties However some properties are set automatically for you by Alliance Builder and cannot be changed When a property is selected a gray color indicates the property is read only and can not be changed while a black color indicates a property that can be changed There are several methods provided to change property values The type of programming
163. e zone assigned to the alarm group defines when the alarm group is active Is user alarm group If checked the alarm group is assigned to users If not checked the alarm group is assigned to RAS Door devices The properties shown in the viewer are programmed in the Control panel programming tab For information on all alarm group programming options see Alarm groups on page 188 Areas viewer This tab shows the following basic area properties programmed in the project Number Area number Name Descriptive area name that will be transferred to the control panel and RAS Entry time Amount of time programmed for the entry timer Exit time Amount of time programmed for the exit timer Armed event flag The event flag activated when the area is armed Disarmed event flag The event flag activated when the area is disarmed The properties shown in the viewer are programmed in the Control panel programming tab For information on all area programming options see Areas on page 178 Chapter 4 99 Panel device tools Time zones viewer This tab shows the following information for all time zones programmed for the project Number Time zone number Description Time zone description Type Hard or soft time zone The properties shown in the viewer are programmed in the Control panel programming tab For information on all time zone programming options see Hard time zones on page 226 and Soft time zones on page 233 Wireless serial numbers viewer
164. ed for the following functions Intrusion Zones can be assigned to a combination of areas in order to provide intrusion control Reporting Areas define which central stations should be called in the event an alarm is generated for that area Arm disarm Zones assigned to an area can be armed disarmed through a RAS device keypad card reader Entry exit Areas define timers that allow specified periods of time to elapse before generating an alarm when the system is armed disarmed Event flags Each area supports numerous event flags that can be used by other programming options such as system macros Text words The area name is stored as a system text word in the control panel that can be seen in the RAS devices Chapter 9 179 Access programming features Programming The following programming options are available for areas Area Number Range 1 to 16 Specify the area to program Name Range Up to 16 characters Specify the name given to the area The name is converted into a system text word and is transferred to the control panel As a result the name will appear within RAS keypad devices Since the system only allows up to 100 user defined text words try to reuse existing text words in the Text word library on page 308 Entry time Range 0 to 255 seconds When entering an armed area containing entry exit zones the entry timer should be set to permit the user ample time to disarm the system before generat
165. ed individually to an input or any output of a gate Essentially the operation inverts the state a NOT true equals false either going into the gate or out of the gate Inverter NOT symbol A X A In the inverter NOT symbol notice that the notation preceding the A in X A indicates that the value of X output is the opposite of A the input The bubble is actually the inverter and as such can be applied to any input to any gate or output of any gate as in the following figure A X A ANDB Cem WR eg The notation for a NOT operation is as in A B and is said NOT A AND B To have a true output X A must be false AND B must be true IA B xX Table 39 NOT gate Input A Input B Output X False False False True False False False True True True True False Appendix A 281 Boolean logic Combination logic The Alliance system allows the user to define macros with up to four logical inputs each having three basic operators with one output In some situations it may be that all inputs are OR gated or AND gated resulting in the following figures Input OR gate input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 Input AND gate input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 These are logic equations of the simplest form To have a positive output on the 4 input OR gate any one of the four inputs needs only be true or positive However all inputs to the AND gate must be true to have a true output Many macros consist o
166. ed text word Description Range 1 to 16 characters Specify the text word description to be stored in the user defined word library The description can include spaces for example Joe Doe Security The following characters are not allowed I Chapter 16 Maintenance and support This chapter provides information on maintenance procedures and technical support contact information In this chapter pij 71 MEM KH CE 274 Contacting technical support 276 274 Alliance Builder User Manual Maintenance Alliance Builder relies on specific data sources and files to store data It is essential that these data sources and files remain intact at all times Alliance Builder automatically manages these data sources their locations and relationships with no action required by the user However if data sources are changed or data files removed the relationships that Alliance Builder relies on will be broken and may result in lost projects A brief explanation of the data sources files and relationships that Alliance Builder uses to store data is provided in the following sections MSDE database Alliance Builder uses Microsoft s MSDE database engine to store application data as well as projects created in Alliance Builder Alliance Builder relies on the database to store information about project file locations properties for devices that have been created and much more All information stored in the MSDE database is managed by A
167. ed to the device and is only used by the management software Chapter 8 167 Control panel programming features Input Range 1 to 4 Provides input as an operand in the Boolean equation for the macro Any input can be inverted prior to the gate operator Input type The user can select the type of input for each of the four inputs The state of the input defined in the input type can be inverted prior to the function Output Defines the behavior and output type that if the result of the equation is true the macro will act on or active If the output type is allocated to a zone the zone selected will not function Because of this mode of operation the zone number assigned may be a phantom zone not physically available Unless inverted NOT the zone will be in an alarm condition when the macro activates and normal when the macro resets The output may be optionally inverted the NOT function Output type Identifies the type of output and what output will be acted on Note that the output result has the inverted option 168 Alliance Builder User Manual Output function The output function allows the user to define what type of output function will be activated by the macro as shown in Table 16 Table 16 Output functions Function name Description Disabled Macro is disabled Non timed The output follows the result of the logic equation only If an event flag or output for this macro changes the logic equat
168. ed when the zone is in alarm The internal siren event flag is programmed in Area programming see Event flags on page 182 for each of the areas assigned to the zone Trigger zone event flag when active Enabled The zone event flag is raised when the zone is active regardless of the status of the areas assigned to the Zone Disabled The zone event flag is only raised when the zone is in alarm i e the zone is active and the area is armed 244 Alliance Builder User Manual Trigger camera event Enabled The camera event flag is raised whenever the zone is in alarm and the area is disarmed Disabled The camera event flag is not raised You must program the camera event flag number option in Area programming see Event flags on page 182 for each of the areas having cameras assigned to the zone To activate the camera event flag when the area is armed enable the make all events 24 hour option When this option is enabled the internal siren event flag option is ignored Print zone when active Enabled When the zone is active a report is generated to the printer as well as the management software Disabled A report is not generated to either the printer or the management software when the zone is active Reporting Chapter 14 Zone and relay programming features Report alarm to central station 1 2 3 and 4 Enabled When the zone is in alarm a report will be sent to the specified
169. egory indicated to change the programming and resolve the problem Select an error row in the list and use the Click to invoke property for the selected row link The property window will open containing the programming related to the error Correct the programming error and click Close to exit the window Chapter 4 107 Panel device tools Virtual relays tool Use the Virtual relays tool to create relays that do not exist in hardware but can be used for general programming To add virtual relays do the following 1 2 Right click on the folder and select Add virtual relay In the number assignment window select a number from the list for the relay and click OK or double click the number to make the assignment Use the Relay programming field to program the relay Give the relay a description indicate if it is inverted and specify the parameters that determine how this relay will be activated Click Close to exit the tool To remove virtual relays from the list do the following l 2 Right click on the relay on the list and select Remove virtual relay Click Close to exit the tool For additional information on relays see Relays on page 230 For information on programming physical relays see Control panel programming tab on page 62 108 Alliance Builder User Manual DVMRs camera tool Use the read only DVMRs cameras tool to view DVMRs and cameras defined in your project Use the drop down menu to select h
170. eir Se ENEE programming viewer helped eese n eren e ter e RE e eee dee hold door unlocked seen holiday ce E p d O O DESCUIDO sitio coste RN eee ATUS UTC M ds programmihg i oeste eterne vb ne egeo eoru eo TIM POU td 28 TOR ives M M M 30 installer OS 85 installer administration joo 85 installer AY POS iicet tiae ite PL eie o Rd 87 VIRILE gc D 85 interlock A ere HG rne deor Yeti eee 155 ON 105 174 243 WOUL esanaia nite aie 143 144 147 149 denied if area arme 138 PETON ELT 138 ISDN ctii d tren ROTE UTERIS 219 EGCD Ee 263 CUSLOMN MESSAGE cicatrices 65 263 LCD keypad egenis ete e HM REESE 112 JI SIDE let limitations control panel is av eta A 161 Time aultres SE 220 270 listenin os seo cee Ree ee 218 222 local alarm MACHO opio ideo rete etta te Ri E dert 166 BOO iii iii aiii 278 MIAME NANCE aiii ita rd 274 APE les cat 274 CPD fl udo etie bid 274 MSDE database eese teen 274 manual address mode eerte 94 tnenu alarm gtOUp et oe reete e htt eet 114 menu bar KO 11 LI T da dd 12 DOVES cviccnssuccugeanh E E N EOE seveiscdsestconedses 11 Co 11 MOSSABE e EE org 263 ECD 65 263 MONON SOS ua 236 MSDE databas8 ooconoononnconocnonoconionorononoononnno eene ente nntnen 274 MSN number asec eee Glee cease epe eae ree du 217 N new project wizard sennen
171. elay is off until event occurs Off on Relay is timed for on off intervals On Relay is always on closed loop The Relay tab also provides a Supervised check box to program the relay as supervised When you have finished adding and programming devices click Close to exit the window 55 56 Alliance Builder User Manual Add cameras to a DVMR After you have added a DVMR device to the system layout you can add cameras to the device double click the DVMR device graphic on the layout Alliance Builder will open the DVMR setup window Use this window to specify DVMR parameters and to add and remove cameras Set DVMR parameters Most of the DVMR setup field is read only information supplied by Alliance Builder and dependent on the type of DVMR selected You can overwrite the default text in the Description box and select a Video standard from a drop down menu LAN settings that can be programmed include a password IP address and Port number Click View all IP addresses assigned to DVMRs to open a window with a read only list containing the number description and IP address for all DVMR devices in your project Consult with your IT administration for network release details Cameras The Defined cameras for this DVMR field provides a tree with the current camera information of the selected DVMR To add a camera do the following 1 Right click the Cameras folder 2 Select the camera you want from the drop down menu The ca
172. em and will dictate the areas the device user has control over the times the alarm group is valid the menus that will be accessible if the RAS is a keypad and the functionality that is supported by the RAS device Alarm groups fall into two distinct categories User alarm group The alarm group assigned to the user determines what alarm control capability if any the user is granted RAS and door alarm group The alarm group assigned to the RAS or door device determines what alarm control capability is supported by the device When an alarm group is created the user alarm group option will decide the category This is why under some programming options the alarm group choices will be much shorter than the total number of groups defined for the entire system For example when adding a user to the system the choice of alarm groups would be limited to only those groups with the user alarm group option enabled It is important to understand how the system resolves the capabilities of a user at a RAS device For example when a user approaches a RAS keypad and enters their PIN the keypad will compare the alarm group capabilities defined for the RAS keypad with the alarm group capabilities defined for the user Only those capabilities that match between the two will be allowed A RAS device that is not programmed to allow alarm control based on the assigned alarm group will not allow alarm control even by a user with an alarm group with t
173. em will report a film out warning to the central station Test mode Specify the test call mode for the system The type of test call selected determines the system tests that will be performed and at what interval they will take place Table 32 describes the test call types Table 32 Test call types Test call type Description No test No automatic test calls made test calls must be activated manually Enable automatic test The disarm or arm test starts automatically when the system is disarmed or armed Manual disarm test The arm test starts automatically when the system is armed The disarm automatic arm test test can only be done using user menu 13 on the LCD keypad Start Automatic disarm Test Automatic disarm test only The disarm test starts automatically when the system is disarmed No arm test is available Output controllers Specify the number of output controllers attached to the control panel This does not include output controllers attached to system DGP devices 254 Alliance Builder User Manual Zone event text word Range 0 to 999 When zones 57 and 58 are active the zone event text word will be displayed on all system LCD keypads The zone event text word can be either a text word from the word library or a user defined text word Number of prefix digits Range 1 to 4 The alarm code prefix enables user codes to be used for both access control and alarm control The prefix ind
174. engineer has entered the Engineer menu 210 Alliance Builder User Manual Test call Test call performs a regular interval report call to the central station This allows the system to ensure that central station reporting is working and that no problems have occurred that would prevent it from reporting access and alarm events All tests are reported as a test call to the central station Types The following types of test calls are available No test No automatic test calls made test calls must be activated manually Enable automatic test The disarm or arm test starts automatically when the system is disarmed or armed Manual disarm test automatic arm test The arm test starts automatically when the system is armed The disarm test can only be done using user menu 13 on the LCD keypad Start Auto Disarm Test Automatic disarm test only The disarm test starts automatically when the system is disarmed No arm test is available Programming The following programming options are available for the test call feature Start test call at Range 24 hour time format hh mm Specify the time the test call should be made The time programmed is based on the control panel s real time clock Test call interval Range 2 digits hours Specify the interval between test calls Chapter 11 211 Diagnostics programming features Extend test call If enabled the test call will be performed only if no events have been reported to ce
175. ent doors For more information see 4 door elevator controllers on page 123 Point ID DGP The Point ID DGP is capable of supervising a variety of addressable devices on a two wire loop A two wire local bus supplies the power to the bus devices and provides command and Chapter 1 33 Introduction status information exchange between the DGP and bus devices The DGP is designed to sit on the LAN of any existing configuration of Alliance products to expand the system with addressable devices The control panel supports up to 15 addressable point ID DGP devices For more information see Point ID DGP on page 129 Wireless DGP The wireless DGP can be located up to 110 feet 335 meters from the control panel The DGP receives information from a range of compatible sensor types programmed into the DGP It features spatial diversity to minimize wireless signal nulls or dead spots and has a nominal open air receiving range of 1500 feet 460 meters A repeater can also be used to eliminate dead spots The control panel supports up to 15 wireless DGP devices DGP devices can be powered from the system data bus or through a remote auxiliary power supply Fob buttons can be programmed for users to arm and disarm or to control relays For example to remotely open and close a garage door as well as arm or disarm an office security system The wireless DGP numbering follows normal DGP numbering The actual zone numbers will depend on the address sett
176. ents For more information see Test call on page 210 Clock correction The clock correction feature allows you to program a correction factor that compensates for a control panel clock that may be running slightly fast or slow For more information see Doors on page 138 Battery test The battery test tests the state of batteries connected to system bus devices For more information see Battery test on page 206 Reporting Central station configuration The central station configuration defines the line account number phone number etc For more in formation see Central Station on page 214 Central station communications Central station communications defines how messages will be recorded and what medium will be used For more information see Communication programming on page 217 Reporting class Reporting classes let you specify what is reported in the event of an alarm For more information see Reporting classes on page 221 Chapter 2 View tabs Zones and relays Zone A zone also known as an input is typically a sensor wired either directly into the control panel through a DGP or through an expander board For more information see Zones on page 236 Zone shunts A zone shunt will bypass a zone for a specified period of time when the zone is in the active state For more information see Zone shunts on page 246 Relay Relays can be either physical relays attached to the control panel and relay expander boards or
177. er User Manual DGP RAS numbering graphics Use the DGP RAS numbering graphics Figure 27 to quickly see the number of DGP and RAS devices that have been used in your project and the number of devices you can add to your project Alliance builder will keep track of the devices and update the graphics as devices are added or deleted from your project For information on how numbering is applied to Alliance projects see Numbering on page 324 Figure 27 DGP RAS numbering graphics Chapter 5 RAS programming features This chapter provides an overview of remote arming station RAS devices and programming features 112 Alliance Builder User Manual RAS remote arming stations RAS remote arming stations are keypads and card readers used to control arming and disarming of areas in system access control and system programming LCD keypads Keypads and readers can use various input methods to arm and disarm areas such as user PIN codes 3x Badging and PIN card A maximum of 16 RAS devices are allowed on the system bus and an additional 16 RAS devices are allowed per local bus reader ports Most keypads and readers can connect directly to the system or a local bus in the system However Wiegand readers require an AL 1170 reader interface device The ability to arm and disarm areas from the RAS device is governed by both the assigned RAS alarm group and the alarm group assigned to the user Both alarm groups must have alarm co
178. erent ee rini AO 89 publication libtaty cri iia 276 369 370 Alliance Builder User Manual PURCHONS MP 113 number p T programming programming viewe nj t 112 reader programming ssec 150 recommended parts 11 o 186 FUNCTIONS 186 programming eege di 186 relay HQ 34 65 96 97 230 JUNCUON Ls 230 II mE 230 programming Rem 65 231 programming viewer coocinninccnnnnnnnnnnnanonncn narra nn ee 96 remote arming station RAN 112 jor AA easa rani aE pae EEEE 245 CI 146 TOQUES ias 5 A A EE ee 5 restriction RIE cana S safety terms and symbols sese 2 GET 11 DE 11 ada 141 246 EE Eeer EE 246 NI 215 219 220 Madri ERO RE d 105 269 SOAK CESU P 241 soft time zone 65 99 233 description function keys functions number DIOBFAMININE o service technician software requirements coccoccccccoccncnnonononono nono nononanon cano rncnninanano 5 system event flag programming ege essere cti HATTA POT oido On ten dem ite eet ate er ees 269 US 276 technician service TIME 44 ccscccsssseenserevssieccesnescentenessvadonae 104 test DAT ite dt sen arto RU Po o GU TU 64 206 OOM H NEE 64 210 E A 241 Eege 269 SOAK D
179. erms and conditions Upon termination of this Agreemen components of the Software and return the Licensed Product to GE SECURITY All provisions of this Agreement relating to i disclaimer of warranties ii imita Agreement if You breach any of these for any reason You agree to uninstall all ions on liability remedies and damages and iii GE SECURITY s proprietary rights shall survive termination of this Agreement 3 Object code The Software is delivered in object code only You may not alter merge modify adapt or translate the Software nor decompile disassemble reverse engineer or otherwise reduce the Software to a human perceivable form nor crea Software e derivative works or programs based on the Intended use 4 Limited warranty GE SECURITY warrants Licensed Produc Software Warranty Period hat for one 1 year from the date of delivery of the he functions contained in the Software will be fit for their intended purpose as described in the applicable Documentation from GE SECURITY and will conform in all material respects to the specifications stated in such Documentation GE SECURITY does not warran that the operation of the Sof does warrant that the media on which the Sofi and workmanship under normal use for a period of thirty 30 days from the date of delivery Media Warranty Period furnished with or y for nonco the Software in the sole discretion of GE SECU formin
180. es continued Appendix F Zone types Number and name Description 13 Entry exit without arm check Does not generate an alarm when the area is disarmed When the area is armed the exit timer starts and activating the zone will not generate an alarm If the entry time has expired an alarm will be generated The zone may be active while arming the area Example Final exit door Programming Program the entry exit time in Area programming and enable the buzzers in RAS programming Disarmed flags none Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 14 Access without arm check Does not generate an alarm when the area is disarmed Generates an alarm when the area is armed Bypassed during entry exit timed periods Example PIR within the area s designated entry exit route Programming Program the entry exit time in Area programming and enable the buzzers in RAS programming Disarmed flags none Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 15 Emergency door Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed Automatically activates an audible alert on the RAS assigned to the same areas regardless of the event flag programming The only event flag activated as specified in Zone Programming is the zone flag If the zone reactivates it generates a new local alarm after the local alarm reminder time Example Emergency door Programming Program the local alarm reminder time in Timers programming Disar
181. es for your project Software managed mode The software manages the addressing and makes programming the project easier ensuring that the device addresses are always correct Devices will be automatically addressed as they are added to the project and updated as changes are made If a project is imported the addresses already set in the project will change to follow the software addressing rules Manually managed mode not available at this time Device address configuration The Device address configuration window lists all device addresses assigned to DGP and RAS system devices The information is a read only feature The following information is provided for all devices on the DGP and RAS tabs Part number The Alliance part number for the device Description The description supplied by Alliance Builder Address number The address number for the device in the project Chapter 4 95 Panel device tools Programming viewers tool Use this tool to quickly display properties programmed in your project Although not all programmed properties are listed the basic properties for each category are shown The Programming viewer tool is a read only feature and cannot be used to edit the information shown RAS devices viewer This viewer shows the following basic RAS device properties programmed in the project Address System address number 1 to 16 assigned by Alliance Builder Description RAS description Alarm group Alarm group
182. ets Alarm group to use when resetting Range Any valid alarm group 1 to 138 Specify the alarm group that will be automatically reset after an alarm in the group has been triggered 204 Alliance Builder User Manual Chapter 11 Diagnostics programming features This chapter provides an overview of diagnostic programming features In this chapter a IESE on GN pe eed qe em eee 206 Clo CONVECTION io coda ob BAe ea ed eed EE er 207 PRES a ore x nas ee x de NEE A HO OA d 209 IIO Acc CREHME HET 210 206 Alliance Builder User Manual Battery test The battery test tests the state of batteries connected to system bus devices All batteries are tested in sequence in order to prevent power problems If a battery is disconnected for more then 10 minutes a warning will be given During the battery test all of the panels and auxiliary driven devices are powered from the battery Devices are tested one at a time to ensure that not all of the devices switch to battery test at the same time Programming The following programming options are available for the battery test Frequency Specify when the battery test should be conducted The choices include Disabled The battery test is not conducted Every working day The battery test is conducted each day Every Monday The battery test is conducted each Monday First Monday of the month The battery test is conducted on the first Monday of each month Start time Specify th
183. evice are shown in angle brackets e Use the Custom entry tree listing the last item on the tree to add anything that doesn t fall into the regular categories This could include such things as Point ID devices Use the Selected parameters field to indicate the following information for the power source device e Description e Standby current e Alarm current e Active current e Duty cycle e Relay inverted The Summary field provides the following totals for the power source device e Total activation current mA e Total base current mA e Device power supply current mA Default current editor Use the Edit zone sensor relay current defaults link at the bottom of the window to access the Default current editor This editor allows you to specify default values for zones and relays If you are using a similar set of sensors this will prevent you from having to adjust all the similar items you assign to the power source device Chapter 2 53 View tabs Select the item to edit from the drop down menu and use the up down arrows to set the following parameters e Default standby current e Default alarm current Default active current Click Close to save the defaults Parameter dialog box Use the up down arrows to set the following parameters e Required number of hours in standby e Required number of minutes in alarm e Required number of seconds in active In the Required number of seconds active utility badge rate
184. evice information without specific programming The DGP default polling mode extended polls up to 16 devices with reporting information such as device changed and antimask tamper Programming The following programming options are available for point ID DGP devices DGP number Range 1 to 15 Specify the DGP address that the DGP will have in the Alliance system This should be the same as the address specified in DGP programming for this controller see DGP number on page 122 Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software DGP address mode Specify the number of DGP addresses reserved for the DGP that drives the total number of point ID devices allowed for the DGP The choices are 1 DGP address Allows up to 16 zones and 16 relays with 1 address 130 Alliance Builder User Manual 1 DGP address plus expansion Allows up to 32 zones and 16 relays with 2 addresses Since each DGP address is limited to a maximum of 16 zones when the number of zones exceeds 16 this mode reserves 2 consecutive DGP addresses Point ID devices The category assigned to the device dictates the programming options available to the device For some DGP devices the address is the only information that needs to be programmed Other devices such as IO devices require additional features to be programmed Point ID device categories All point ID d
185. evices are assigned one of the following categories e Miscellaneous e PIR e Glassbreak e Conventional smoke e Analog smoke e JO Point ID device zone relay numbering When a point ID device is added to a point ID DGP the device is assigned a system zone number This number is based on both the DGP system address see Numbering on page 324 and the address assigned to the device using the DIP switches The zone range is determined by the DGP address mode assigned to the DGP If the mode is set to DGP address the maximum number of zones will be 16 If the mode is set to zone address plus expansion the maximum number of zones will be 32 Example 1 The point ID DGP system address is set to 2 and the device is assigned point ID device address 1 Since the DGP 2 zone range is 33 to 48 and the device address is 1 the associated zone number for the device will be 33 Example 2 The point ID DGP system address is set to 3 and the device is assigned point ID device address 4 Since the DGP 3 zone range is 49 to 64 and the device address is 4 the associated zone number for the device will be 52 Chapter 6 131 DGP programming features Relay numbering follows the same rules but to configure relays the point ID device category must be an IO and the device must have onboard relays Example 1 The point ID DGP system address is set to 2 and the device is assigned point ID device address 1 Since the DGP 2 zone range is 33 to 48 and th
186. f a combination of gates to drive an output and the programmer must have a basic understanding of how to use a combination of logic gates to drive the output Each input will have the ability to be OR gated or AND gates with the following input 1 AND 2 OR30R4 X input 1 input 2 X input 3 input 4 This logic function with inputs 1 and 2 AND gated results in the gate providing one input to a 3 input OR gate If either 3 or 4 are true the output will be true If both inputs 1 and 2 are true the output will be true because the output of the AND gate for inputs 1 and 2 are OR gated to the result 1 OR 2 OR 3 ANDA X 282 Alliance Builder User Manual input 1 input 2 input 3 X input 4 Input 4 must be true and any one of inputs 1 2 or 3 must be true for X to be true Input 4 enables any of the OR gated inputs to drive X Appendix A 283 Boolean logic Examples of macros applied to Boolean logic The following examples are guidelines to help you create macros and map them to the underlying Boolean logic Example 1 4 input OR gate Table 40 Example 1 Input OR AND Result 1 OR If any of the inputs activate collectively or individually the output will be triggered 2 OR 3 OR 4 OR The inputs are activated by an output relay activating or an event flag activating All inputs may be optionally individually inverted the NOT function Any unused inputs should be set to OR The logical eq
187. fined in the Installer administration tool and must have a white background It cannot be a transparency Save the report as a PDF file We recommend you save the report as a PDF file and print the report from the PDF file To save the report as a PDF file do the following 1 Select all of the required components from the list by selecting them individually or by clicking Check all Click Save to PDF When the dialog box appears indicate where you want to store the file and click Save The progress bar at the bottom right corner of the window will indicate when the process is complete You can then print the PDF Click Close to exit the tool Chapter 3 83 Alliance Builder tools Print the report For the best print job we recommend that you print from a PDF file as detailed in the section above But if you want to print directly from the report do the following 1 Select all of the required components from the list 2 Click Print 3 Click Close to exit the tool Print preview To see what the printed report will look like and how long it will be click Print preview The Print preview window shows how each page will print and indicates the number of pages the report will take You can use the icons provided to view different page layouts and zoom in and out to view page details 84 Alliance Builder User Manual Architecture view tool Use the Architecture view tool to get an overview of how project devices re
188. for your project that will be used for the project list and specify a project folder where all project files will be stored Click Next Project information Enter the project information specific to this project including the job ID and a project description if required Click Next Customer information Enter the customer information specific to this project including the customer name phone number and address Click Next Control panel Select the Alliance control panel for the project from the drop down list A list of attributes is provided for the selected panel Use this information to ensure that the control panel selected is adequate for your project requirements Click Next Firmware version Select a firmware version from the drop down menu A list of attributes is provided for the selected version Use this information to ensure the version selected is appropriate Click Next Enclosure Select the appropriate enclosure for the control panel from the drop down list A description and a graphical representation of various board layouts for the selected enclosure is provided Click Next Transformer Select a transformer from the drop down menu The selection available is driven by the device and enclosure already selected for the project A description is provided for the selected transformer Click Next 39 40 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 3 New project wizard continued
189. g programmed The wireless DGP system address is DGP 2 with the zone range of 33 to 48 The associated zone number for the device will be 36 136 Alliance Builder User Manual Supervision flag Supervision options set the supervision mode for each zone Supervision may be controlled by the first relay of each DGP For example relay 17 would control the supervision for DGP 1 The following supervision flags are available Enabled Supervision is enabled Disabled Supervision is disabled Relay controlled Supervision is controlled by the state of the first relay number for the wireless DGP For example relay 17 for DGP 1 Key fob programming Each wireless DGP supports up to 16 key fob devices Depending on the type each key fob will have two or four buttons which offer the options shown in Table 10 Table 10 Key fob options Key fob button function Description User When the button is pressed the assigned user number will arm disarm the system Relay When the button is pressed the assigned relay is activated deactivated Unused The button is not used Serial number The sensor serial number specifies the sensor that the fob will trip when activated Chapter 7 Door programming features This chapter provides an overview of doors and door programming features In this chapter Door access programming ssec Door request to exit RTE programming Door alarm control program
190. g Software contact GE SECURITY Custo www gesecurity com during the Software Warranty Period Your exclusive remedy under this limited warra nty for de ective medi replacement media under this limited warran Media Warranty Period EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY P WARRANTY OF ANY K WARRANTIES OF EXPRESSLY PROV ERCH DED 5 Limitation of liability GE SECURI REPLACEMENT OF THE REPAIR OR ACCORDING TO THE LIM DAMAGES WHETHER CONSEQUENT LOST SAVINGS ARIS LOSS OF PROFITS OR ABOVE YOU THE LICENSED PRODUCT with proo ROVIDED ABOVE 1 ANTABILITY OR FIT ASSUM ONCO TED WARRANTY A AL IN OR DOCUMENTATION O PARTY 6 General Any hardwa violation of any export provisions o attempt to sublicense a Oregon BILITY O re provided ssign or of payment HE ND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIM NESS FOR A PARTICU E TH TY S SOLE ware will be uninterrupted or error free GE SECURITY ware is furnished will be free from defects in materials Except as specifically provided therein any other software and any hardware accompanying the Software i remedy under this limited warran is not warranted by GE SECURITY Your exclusive nforming Software shall be repair or replacement of RITY To obtain a repair or replacement of noncon mer Service toll free at 888 GESECURity or online at a is replacement of the defective media To receive y return the defec
191. g functions Specify area alarm control limitations Allows restricting alarm control to specified areas For some areas a user is able to arm disarm In others they may only disarm Incorporate delays in area disarm functionality Apply hardware timers when certain areas are disarmed Programming The following programming options are available for alarm group restrictions Restriction number Range 1 to 7 Specify the alarm group restriction to program Name Range Up to 16 characters Specify the name of the alarm group restriction The name is converted into a system text word and is subsequently transferred to the control panel As a result the name will appear within LCD RAS keypad devices Since the system only allows up to 100 user defined text words try to reuse existing text words in the text word library see Text word library on page 308 Timed disarmed areas Range 1 to 16 Specify the areas to program for time disarm This includes e Areas that automatically rearm after a timed disarmed period e Automatic arm disarm areas to enable the postponed and warning time The timed areas required when programming vault areas Chapter 10 199 Alarm control programming features The time for the restriction is defined in the alarm group restriction disarmed time option in Timers programming see Alarm group restriction I to 7 disarmed time on page 172 Areas to arm reset Range 1 to 16 Specify the areas that lim
192. g project list on the Project List tab 42 Alliance Builder User Manual Templates The following templates are available through the Create from template wizard Easy 1 Basic intrusion using dial up Basic intrusion using direct connect Expanded intrusion using direct connect DGP expanded intrusion using direct connect Intrusion using direct connect and 4 Smart RAS access Intrusion using direct connect and 4 Smart RAS access w OC pl gv pe dB we e Intrusion using direct connect and a 4 Wiegand RAS access relay at the panel Moderate 1 Intrusion using direct connect and 4 Wiegand RAS access relay at the door 2 Intrusion using direct connect and 4 door controller DGP with Smart readers 3 Intrusion using direct connect and 4 door controller DGP with Wiegand readers 4 Wireless intrusion using direct connect 5 Point ID intrusion using direct connect Experienced 1 Intrusion using direct connect and 4 door controller DGP with Wiegand readers antipassback 2 Intrusion using direct connect and 4 door control DGP with Smart readers antipassback 3 Intrusion using direct connect and 4 elevator controller DGP with Smart readers Chapter 2 43 View tabs Import APF archive To import a project from an Alliance software management program or another Alliance Builder program do the following 1 Click Import APF archive 2 Browse to select the system configuration file you want to import
193. g this time frame a warning timer can also be specified that could be applied to indicate that the zone is about to become active As soon as the shunt timer expires the zone will generate an alarm if it is in the active state Functions Zone shunts can be used for the following functions Doors When an unlock relay is initiated you can bypass certain zones for a specific period of time Alarms prevention Prevents zones that become active from generating alarms for a specified period of time Warnings Can be programmed to give warning that the zone shunt is about to expire Output to start timer An optional output can be used to start the shunt timer Shunt event flag Raises a shunt event flag that can be used by other programming mechanisms For example when a zone is shunted trigger a relay in order to perform some other function Shunt behavior Provides several options that dictate the behavior of the zone shunt Chapter 14 247 Zone and relay programming features Programming The following programming options are available for zone shunts Shunt number Range 1 to 16 Specify which zone shunt is being programmed Description Specify a 40 character text description of the zone shunt The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Zone number to shunt Range 0 to 255 Specify the zone number to be shunted for the programmed time Shunt warning time Range 0
194. ge 10K 4 7k 2 2k Specify the value to set the type of end of line resistor that is used in the system Duress type Specify the duress type to use to activate the duress function The duress function activates a silent signal to alert security personnel via the central station For example if a user is forced under threat to disarm the system they can enter a disarm code plus duress code to disarm the system and silently send a duress signal to the central station Increment last digit A duress digit in conjunction with the PIN code is used The duress digit is the last digit of the PIN plus one 1 If the last digit of the PIN code is 9 then the duress digit is 0 For example if the user s PIN code is 1234 the duress digit will be 5 To disarm the system and active the duress signal the user will enter 12345 Add zero to end If the user adds a zero to their PIN code the duress signal is sent to the central station For example if the user s PIN code is 1234 the duress digit will be 0 To disarm the system and active the duress signal the user will enter 12340 Siren type Specify the one of the following siren types Standard speaker tone The 16th output is activated and a saw tooth signal is generated at the siren output Alliance Builder User Manual Volts on The 16th output is activated and a constant DC voltage is set at the siren output Programmable tones speaker or volts The 12th 13th 14th 15th a
195. han the shunt time an alarm is generated based on the zone type Zone shunting and DOTL The door is shunted for the specified shunt time If the door is left open longer than the shunt time a DOTL door open too long alarm is generated Enables forced door and DOTL to be reported on separate zone numbers Autoshunting and DOTL If the area assigned to the door is disarmed shunting of the door begins when the door zone is active no code or card required Enables forced door and DOTL to be reported on separate zone numbers Shunt time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the amount of time the door can be open when a user is granted access without generating an alarm This value is the total number of seconds user has to pass through the door and shuts it again Extended shunt time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the amount of time the door is can be open when a user with extended access is granted access This option is useful when additional time should be granted to special users to meet ADA requirements Warning time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the amount of time for a relay to activate before the shunt extended shunt time expires Low security time zone Range 0 to 24 Chapter 7 143 Door programming features Define the hard time zone which when valid only requires a valid card PIN to open the door When the time zone is invalid and the card PIN IN reader or card PIN OUT reader option is enabled a
196. hat capability Hard coded alarm groups Chapter 10 Alarm control programming features The system by default provides the ten hard coded alarm groups shown in Table 18 Table 18 Hard coded alarm groups Number Name 1 No access Description All user menu options disabled Cannot access any areas Assigned to users 2 Master RAS or door All user menu options enabled Access to areas 1 to 16 All alarm group restrictions enabled Assigned to devices 3 Master code access All user menu options enabled Access to areas 1 to 16 Assigned to devices 4 8 Area master RAS 1 to 8 All user menu options enabled Access limited to areas 1 to 8 All alarm group restrictions enabled Assigned to devices 5 8 Area master RAS 9 to 16 All user menu options enabled Access limited to areas 9 to 16 All alarm group restrictions enabled Assigned to devices 6 Master installer All user menu options enabled Access to areas 1 to 16 No alarm control Assigned to devices 7 Manager All user menu options enabled except Installer programming Access to areas 1 to 16 Assigned to users 189 190 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 18 Hard coded alarm groups continued Number Name Description 8 Spare alarm group All user menu options disabled Cannot access any areas Assigned to devices 9 Master service All user menu options enabled Access to areas 1 to 16 Time zone 2
197. he box tamper before the tamper alarm is activated This is used to protect against unauthorized entry by an installer Disabled An authorized user can always enter LCD keupad installer programming Opening the box will always cause a tamper alarm Send arming after exit Enabled When armed an area will defer the reporting of arming to the central station until the exit time has ended Disabled An area will not defer the reporting of arming to the central station Bypass alarm reporting on exit fault Enabled Bypasses reporting of alarms with a reporting code of 17 24 burglar alarm when the exit timer is running Alarms that occur during the exit time will set the exit fault flag and disable further alarms on the assigned areas until the areas are disarmed Disabled Alarms are reported immediately Disable tamper reporting in disarm Enabled Zone tamper and restore events will not report to the central station if the assigned areas are disarmed If a tamper occurs while disarmed the action will log Disabled Zone tamper and restore events will report to the central station if the assigned areas are disarmed Bypass external siren and strobe for tamper in disarm Enabled Zone and system tampers will only activate the internal siren Disabled Internal and external sirens and the strobe will activate as a result of tamper events Installer dual code Enabled Two users are required to enter the
198. he cable calculation you must use the As built tool on page 81 78 Alliance Builder User Manual Chapter 3 Alliance Builder tools The top row of tools in the tool bar are used for programming functions that are not downloaded to the control panel In this chapter Device polius fool or ora d Ae ex ese RR ME ect ENCISO Ee oh o Rupe P exe EAS PUER As bull tool EL Architecture view Tool Anto PAYNE TOOL ech a a Sa ae ean ee das Installer administration Zoo Device property window tool PO toal aa es ick ins cele come D bte eed 80 Alliance Builder User Manual Device polling tool The control panel uses polling to communicate with all DGP and RAS devices and gather status information If a DGP or RAS device is not polled alarms on any zones associated with the device are not reported or logged Use the Device polling tool to indicate if you want the control panel to poll devices We recommend you select Enable all polling to ensure that all devices on the system are programmed to be polled by the control panel This tool can save you a lot of time by enabling polling for all devices and eliminating the need to program each device to be polled Select Disable all polling if you want to wait until you complete your programming before you enable polling or if you want to only enable polling for specific devices Enclosures tool Use the Enclosures tool to open or close all device enclosures on the System bus layout tab
199. her than the control panel redundant user database Resources The memory module attached to the control panel defines the maximum number of programming elements Multiple panel configurations Each control panel is assigned a unique address identifier This address is used when configuring systems containing more than one control panel Chapter 8 165 Control panel programming features Programming The following programming options are available for control panels Control panel number Range 1 to 7 Specify the control panel number Note The total number of control panels allowed per system is less than the specification in order to account for latency issues Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Model Specify the control panel model The selected model will dictate the overall capabilities and limits of the system Memory Specify the memory module attached to the control panel Note Memory expansion must be paired between control panels and all 4 door elevator controllers Address Assign a unique address for each control panel within a system Although the control panel address is only programmed using the keypad when management software programs create additional panels the database treats them as control panel 2 3 etc 166 Alliance Builder User Manual Macro logic Macro logic provides a
200. hours Time zones time zone OOH Event to output OP Triggers on IPUT EF Disabled by OOH time zone Macro programming Macro output On timed 1 to 255 seconds Timed TIMED AREA Input 1 EF EF Input 2 O P OOH OP EF AND Input 3 Input 4 Activate EF CHIME EF Appendix B Card access This appendix provides an overview of how the Alliance system uses card readers for access control Alliance provides user input through personalized cards for each user that has access to the areas controlled by the system In this appendix Card and card reader types 298 Card formats and data fields lesus 298 Smart card programming 299 Reader configuration code 300 Spent COMES oo ak eae bb ke E ER ce EY de 302 A E E E 302 IUM intelligent user module and memory 303 j e Um 304 298 Alliance Builder User Manual Card and card reader types There are three basic types of cards and card readers Magnetic swipe Magnetic scope cards have a magnetic strip along the edge of the card that contains encoded information about the user The information is communicated when the card is moved through the card slot of the reader The information stored on these cards must be specified during the purchasing process The Alliance system currently supports several magnetic readers and keypads Wiegand Wiegand proximity cards have user information embedded on the card This information must be specified during the purchas
201. icates the number of digits that have to be entered to have alarm control If those digits are not entered left blank only access control may be performed For example if the alarm code prefix is two digits and a users PIN code is 123456 then 123456 will be entered for alarm control or 3456 for access control LCD rotation speed Range 0 to 15 Specify the rotation speed for text displayed on LCD keypads The default value is 8 Any value from 9 to 15 decreases the text rotation speed Any value from 1 to 7 increases the text rotation speed Time before rotate Range 0 to 15 Specify the time before LCD text starts to rotate The default value is 8 Any value from 9 to 15 increases the time before text rotation starts Any value from 1 to 7 decreases the time before text rotation starts User offset Range 65536 to 65536 The user offset provides the ability for the control panel to adjust the numeric value of user numbers being reported to the management software The number entered will be Chapter 15 255 Miscellaneous programming features added subtracted if it is negative to the user number in the control panel and sent to the management software This can be used in conjunction with the system code offsets This option is of particular benefit to the management software administrator A typical application would be to have numbers appearing in reports conform to a specific numeric range End of line EOL resistor Ran
202. idually inverted the NOT function Any unused inputs should be set to OR The logical equation can be combined with any output function except for the latched output function These rules apply to all examples except for example 8 the actual latched output function example Logical symbol input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 Output Logical equation Input Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Output 290 Alliance Builder User Manual Example 8 RS flip flop 3 x SET inputs 1 x RESET input Table 47 Example 8 Input OR AND Result 1 OR AND SET the RS flip flop output 2 OR AND SET the RS flip flop output 3 OR AND SET the RS flip flop output 4 OR AND RESET the RS flip flop When the output function is set to latched the macro is not looking at all to logical expression OR or AND for all input The first 3 inputs will be handled as SET inputs and the fourth input will be handled as a RESET input of a RS flip flop The RESET will always predominate the SET inputs Inverting the input conditions or output conditions is still applicable Logical symbol input 1 input2 input3 input4 R cir Q Output Logical equation Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 SET output Input 4 RESET output Appendix A 291 Boolean logic Commonly used macros The following are examples of commonly used helpful macros Door control using different door unlock time Description Door control using different door unlock time
203. ies for local bus devices click the device graphic The Properties tab will populate with the properties for that device Only the Description property can be changed all other properties are read only You can overwrite the default text for the description property to identify the device for system programming If DIP switches are used on the device to set the device address the graphic in the Device address DIP settings field will indicate how the DIP switches should be set The graphic will be disabled if the device selected does not have DIP switches Chapter 2 61 View tabs To remove a local bus device right click the device graphic and select Remove device from the list Program DGP properties Although basic DGP programming for the 4 elevator controller can be done from the System bus layout tab you can also access the same programming from the Local bus layout tab Use the Click to view 4 elevator controller properties link at the top of the local bus graphic to populate the selected properties options with information for the DGP Use the methods detailed in Property programming on page 18 to program the options Program door elevator properties Use the Click to setup Door link at the top of each door graphic to program door properties for each door Select either Click to view Door properties or Click to view elevator properties from the list The selected properties options will populate with the information for that specific d
204. ified areas when requesting status information from the control panel It is important to remember that the areas specified here are not used for area control The purpose of this option is to enable the 4 door elevator controller to identify the status of areas and know whether or not to send an arm disarm command to the control panel The alarm groups specified in Door alarm control programming will dictate which areas have alarm control not the areas specified here Chapter 7 157 Door programming features Door floor groups Door and floor groups are programmed using an Alliance management software program they are not programmed in Alliance Builder These groups dictate when access is granted to 4 floor controller floors 1 to 64 and 4 door controller intelligent doors 1 to 64 Each device within the door floor group may have unique time zones assigned The door group considers all RAS intelligent doors as simply doors RAS devices connected to the system bus 1 to 16 are configured in RAS Programming while all other RAS devices that make up intelligent doors 17 to 64 are configured in Door Programming When a door floor group is added or programmed the system will automatically populate the door floor list with all known doors floors system RAS devices and intelligent doors floors Functions Door floor groups can be used for the following functions Assign unique times Each RAS device that appears in the door group
205. igned bus address 3 RAS 3 e Reader Port 4 Assigned bus address 4 RAS 4 Some devices such as the Wiegand reader do not have provisions for bus addresses Therefore when configuring RAS devices within the controller the first four RAS numbers correspond to the reader ports The reader port number follows the RAS number address Door RAS numbering Table 6 shows the door RAS numbering scheme Table 6 Door RAS numbering Door number IN RAS address IN RAS address OUT RAS address OUT RAS address Door 1 1 reader port 1 5 9 13 Door 2 2 reader port 2 6 10 14 Door 3 3 reader port 3 7 11 15 Door 4 4 reader port 4 8 12 16 124 Alliance Builder User Manual Functions The 4 door elevator controller DGP devices can be used for the following functions Unique DGP programming Provides programming that goes outside the bounds of the DGP programming section Output controllers Specifies output controllers connected to the door elevator controller RAS devices Configures RAS devices connected to the door elevator controller s local bus Timers Assigns specific times for badging a reader or entering a PIN on a keypad Events Configures door elevator controller specific events Card batches Handles card batching Note Only applicable to door elevator controllers without IUM memory modules Programming The following programming options are available for 4 door elevator controllers DGP Rang
206. ined on the system bus only 12 of the devices can be 4 door elevator controllers Table 53 shows the door numbers zones and relays that would be associated with each 4 door elevator controller address on the system bus Table 53 4 door elevator controller addresses DGP address Door numbers Zones inputs Relays outputs 1 17 20 17 32 17 32 2 21 24 33 48 33 48 3 25 28 49 64 49 64 4 29 32 65 80 65 80 5 33 36 81 96 81 96 6 37 40 97 112 97 112 7 41 44 113 128 113 128 8 45 48 129 144 129 144 9 49 52 145 160 145 160 10 53 56 161 178 161 178 11 57 60 179 192 179 192 12 61 64 193 208 193 208 329 330 Alliance Builder User Manual Zone and relay mapping When a 4 door elevator controller is assigned a DGP address on the system bus it automatically calculates its default zone and relay numbers The controller has four onboard relays that by default are designated as unlock relays Only numbers associated with the DGP address can be assigned to these zone and relay functions These 4 door elevator controller relay assignments only activate relays connected to it If zones are disabled they revert to being normal DGP system zones Any zones assigned as door contact zones or DOTL zones also have to be assigned a zone type in Zone programming The zone type assigned defines how the system responds to alarms on these zones Relays and exp
207. information and general information for the current project Logout Log out without closing the application Exit Closes the application Tools The Tools menu provides the following options Take screenshot Take a screenshot of the screen currently shown in Alliance Builder Show tooltips Enable the blue bubble tooltips for Alliance Builder This option does not impact the standard Windows tooltips Parts The Parts menu includes the following options Recommended parts options When you add certain devices to the project in the System layout tab you have the option through a dialog box to also add recommended parts for the device The parts you check are added to the project and 12 Alliance Builder User Manual will appear on the parts list and in the As built report You can use this menu option to set the program to automatically check all the recommended parts for the devices you add to the layout Parts dialog behavior Use this menu to indicate if you want Alliance Builder to recommend parts when you add devices to the project Export parts Export the current project s parts list or export all supported parts to a file Import parts Use this option to import parts lists to the Parts list tab The Import third party parts dialog box can also be accessed through the Parts list tab See Import third party parts on page 70 for details Organize third party parts Use this dialog box to organize your third party parts
208. ing an alarm Each area supports one entry timer Entry exit zones are defined as zone types 3 entry exit alarm 4 access zone 13 entry exit without arm check 14 access without arm check 41 entry exit emergency door and 42 entry exit emergency door with code However the timer will only start with zone types 3 13 41 and 42 If zones are assigned to more than one area the longest entry exit time is used The entry time must be more than 10 seconds The default is set at 30 seconds 180 Alliance Builder User Manual Exit time Range 0 to 255 seconds When exiting an area that has been armed containing entry exit zones the exit timer will start in order to give the user ample time to leave the premises before generating an alarm Each area supports one exit timer If zones are assigned to more than one area the longest entry exit time is used Key box timer Range 0 to 255 minutes The key box timer determines the exit time by the duration specified in minutes Immediately after the exit timer expires the key box timer starts Before this additional key box timer expires the zone must be closed If it is not closed a full alarm will be triggered again even if the previous trigger was also an alarm During the exit timer and key box timer openings and closings will not be registered and will not generate an alarm Area disarmed time Range 0 to 255 minutes When using alarm group restrictions the
209. ing process The cards are read by placing them in close proximity to a Wiegand reader Smart cards Smart cards allow the Alliance administrator to program access cards through an Alliance management software program These cards can be reprogrammed as needed Smart cards are read by placing them in close proximity to a proximity card reader Card formats and data fields When a card is read by a reader the system code and the card number are communicated Depending on the type of card used this information is either embedded on the card when purchased or programmed by the Alliance smart card programmer The following types of formats can be used with an Alliance system magnetic swipe card System code range from 0 to 65535 card number range from 0 to 65535 26 bit Wiegand System code range from 0 to 255 card number range from 0 to 65535 27 bit Tecom Wiegand System code range from 0 to 247 card number range from 0 to 65535 Smart card Aritech Wiegand ASC recommended 26 bit Wiegand Appendix B 299 Card access Smart card programming When a smart card is purchased it has no embedded information and must be programmed to communicate with the reader To program smart cards you use an Alliance management software program and a card programmer The programming password and the site codes are two key elements that you must know prior to programming You must also have a basic understanding of the Alliance system Smart
210. ings for the DGP Sensors communicating with a wireless DGP will consume different numbers of zones depending on the device category Check the sensor s installation programming manual to determine the number of zones that are consumed For more information see Wireless DGP on page 132 Expansion Expansion modules provide a means of extending the zone input or relay output space Expansion modules can be connected to the control panel via the expansion channel or they can be connected to a DGP device The zone space consumed is dependent on the type of expansion module used Zones inputs A zone provides input status to the system either through a DGP or directly through the control panel Zones are identified with a unique number This number is assigned to the zone during installation All reports or displays regarding a particular zone s status will use this unique number 34 Alliance Builder User Manual The Alliance 4X17 series control panels have 16 on board zones that are referred to as hard wired zones because the zone input from a sensor is wired directly to the control panel via a series of connectors see Zones on page 236 Zone types and behavior The zone type basically defines the behavior of the system based on the zone s input status or the actions taken when the input status transitions from one state to another A zone s status is communicated to the input connection either by digital methods in the case of
211. ion will be calculated again Pulsed Activates the output for the programmed time or the active period of the logic result whichever is the shortest On pulse 1 to 255 seconds on pulse 1 to 255 minutes Timed Activates the output for the specified time period regardless of the macro output changing On timed 1 to 255 seconds on timed 1 to 255 minutes Delayed Activates the output after the specified timer expires unless the result of the logic equation is no longer valid On delay 1 to 255 seconds on delay 1 to 255 minutes Non delayed Follows the results of the logic equation but remains active for the time programmed after the result of the logic equation is no longer active Off delay 1 to 255 seconds off delay 1 to 255 minutes Latched When the output function is set to latched the macro is not looking to the logical expressions OR or AND for all inputs The first three inputs will be handled as SET inputs and the fourth input will be handled as a RESET input of a RS Flip flop The RESET will always predominate the SET inputs Inverting the input conditions or output conditions is still applicable Output duration Specify the time period applied to the output function Only applicable for time based output functions such as timed and delay The range is from 1 to 255 and the time period varies between seconds or minutes depending on output function selected Chapter 8 169 Control pane
212. ir PIN codes to enable installer programming The second code must be a valid user code with no access to the installer menu Disabled Two user PIN codes are not required to enable installer programming Chapter 15 263 Miscellaneous programming features Custom LCD message The custom LCD message allows you to modify the text displayed on the RAS devices connected to the control panel You may enter up to 32 characters for this text You will only see this text displayed on the RAS device if there are no alarms or system messages Programming The following programming option is available for the custom LCD message feature Text Specify the 32 characters of customized text that will be displayed on the LCD arming station RAS in place of the normal Alarms display The 32 characters can include numbers spaces or punctuation but the following characters are not allowed 264 Alliance Builder User Manual Event Flags Event flags are used by the system in order to signal an event When a certain event occurs event flags are raised to notify other programming options to perform a specified function Below are a few common event flag uses Relays Relay programming associates an event flag with a physical logical relay When the event flag is raised the relay will fire Doors Each RAS device supports a door event flag that is raised whenever a user is granted access Macro logic Macro logic uses event flags in AND
213. ird TZ 536 Servery 485 Stair 221 Service 202 Stairway 222 Service bay 405 Station 223 Service manager 486 Stereo 224 Services room 487 Stop 290 Shop 203 Stock hand 371 Short Tom 204 Stock hand 1 372 Show 205 Stock hand 2 373 Side 206 Stock hand 3 374 Sign 208 Stock room 406 Single 488 Store 225 Appendix C Text word library Siren 209 Store manager 366 Shutter 210 Store manager day 368 Sliding 211 Store room 331 Small 289 Storage 226 Small equipment store 489 Strobe 227 Small group 490 Strong room 359 Smoke 212 Strike 228 Sound 213 Student center 498 South 214 Student waiting 499 South East 215 Studies 500 South West 216 Studio 501 Spare 217 Substation 319 Special 491 Sump 291 Special access 1 414 Supermarket 229 Special access 2 415 Supervisor 230 Special access 3 416 Surveillance 231 Special education area 492 Switch 232 Sports store 493 Switchboard 292 Spray 494 System 233 Sprinkler 218 319 320 Alliance Builder User Manual T Tamper 234 Textile store 509 Tape 235 The Challenger 044 Teacher 504 Time 238 Teacher work 505 To 239 Tea room 502 Toilet 240 Technical 301 Tool 241 Technician 506 Top 242 Telecom 320 Trading 271 Teller 236 Trades 510 Temp GLA 507 Transmitter 243 Temp typing 508 Trap 244 Temperature 237 Typing GLA 511 U Ult
214. ired use one time zone with an end time of 24 00 and another time zone with a start time of 00 00 Functions Automatic arm disarm can be used for the following functions Hands free arm disarm This feature guarantees that the system will arm disarm at specified times without any user interaction Variable arm disarm options A number of arm disarm options are available based on the alarm group configuration Programming The following programming options are available for automatic arm disarm Program number Range 1 to 16 Specify the automatic arm disarm option to program Each combination of a time zone and an alarm group is called a program There are 16 programs one for each possible area A different program must be completed for each area or set of areas where a different function is required 202 Alliance Builder User Manual Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Time zone number Range 0 to 24 Specify the days times when the system automatically arms disarms the associated areas This option is limited to only hard time zones The time zone start time dictates when the areas will disarm The time zone end time dictates when the areas will arm Alarm group number Specify the alarm group to associate with the current program number Since an alarm group defines alarm control for specified areas
215. is armed the specified event flag is raised when any zone assigned to this area generates an alarm This will cause the internal siren to sound The default is event flag 13 Exit event flag The specified event flag is raised when the exit timer is running Entry event flag The specified event flag is raised when the entry timer is running Local alarm event flag The specified event flag is raised when emergency doors and 24 hour local alarm zone generate an alarm Warning event flag The specified event flag is raised when an alarm group restriction timer is running and the area is about to be armed or a test mode is in progress and the test is about to end Camera event flag The specified event flag is raised when a zone having the camera event generates an alarm and the area is disarmed The flag is used to control cameras Prealarm event flag The specified event flag is raised when a delayed disarmed alarm zone is active and the delay time is running Used to provide visual indication of a possible alarm The event flag is only activated for the delayed period Chapter 9 Access programming features Out of hours time zone The specified event flag is raised when an area is disarmed when it should be armed Generates a report if the area is disarmed while the area should be armed The message reported depends on the type of transmission protocol This option is commo
216. is intended for testing devices activated by disarmed alarm zones such as panic alarm buttons Set pre alarm during disarm test The zone flag defined in Area programming This test is intended for devices that are activated during the delayed panic alarm button time is tested during the arm test and will raise the pre alarm event Frequently used detector Indicates this zone will be used during remote diagnostics in order to determine which zone has not been triggered during the last six hours after the last arming Chapter 14 241 Zone and relay programming features Enable soak test Purpose Enable the zone soak test mode The soak test period is started when this option is enabled This period of time from 0 to 255 days is set in soak test days in Control panel options programming see Soak test days on page 257 If the value is set to zero the soak test period is infinite and must be disabled by the user The test results are logged in the history file The soak test can be used to diagnose problems without causing false alarms When a zone is set to soak test it does not e Report to central station e Activate siren e Activate strobe e Activate any outputs relays The change of the zone state is logged in the history file with events soak alarm and soak alarm restore If the zone does not go into alarm during the soak test period the enable soak test option for that zone will be reset when the
217. it alarm control to arm reset This allows a user to arm areas specified by the user s alarm group or to reset alarms in those areas the user cannot disarm Timed disarmed areas and areas to arm reset When enabling areas for both functions a user entering a code causes all the timed disarm functions to apply except when re entering a code in which case the arm reset function applies In the latter case the system is armed regardless of any running timers Alternate alarm group restrictions Specify additional restrictions when the original alarm group is not valid due to an invalid time zone Each alarm group can be programmed to accept a single alternate alarm group When the primary alarm group assigned for example to a user is invalid due to an invalid time zone the system will check to see if an alternate is defined If so the system will use the alternate Under this scenario the system will use the alternate alarm group restriction properties Table 20 shows an example of an alarm group set up Table 20 Alarm group example Option Alarm group 31 Alarm group 32 Alarm group 33 Areas land 2 land 2 1 Alarm group restriction 4 4 4 Time zone 1 2 0 Alternate alarm group 32 33 None 200 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 21 shows how the alternate alarm group restrictions are configured for the example Table 21 Alternate alarm group restrictions configuration Option Standard First alternat
218. ive when this option is set if based on all programmed options the relay would normally be active Set output text Specify the text message that is displayed by the management software when the relay state is set Reset output text Specify the text message that is displayed by the management software when the relay is reset Chapter 14 233 Zone and relay programming features Soft time zones The control panel provides 16 programmable soft time zones Soft time zones are similar to system macros in that they are programmable logic that can ultimately be used to enable disable certain actions Soft time zones are also used to program keypad function keys F1 F4 Soft time zones are only active when the associated relay is active The state of the relay will drive the state of the time zone A special soft time zone is provided that can prevent service technicians from accessing the control panel Functions Soft time zones can be used for the following functions Door group Dictates whether or not a door can be opened when a soft time zone is assigned to the door group Relay A soft time zone is only valid when the relay that is associated with the time zone is active otherwise it is invalid Types Alliance provides the following types of soft time zones Service technician Soft time zone 25 is hard wired and cannot be programmed This time zone is used to grant deny access to the service technician Programmable
219. l GE part to the parts list do the following 1 Selecta part from the parts tree in the left pane interface Figure 22 When a part is selected a brief description of the part will display in the Selected information field Figure 22 GE parts tree g GE Security Parts List S Expanders E Software E Access Cards 4 Accessories 1 Power Cables Connectors amp Enclosures w Printers a E Contacts Motion Sensors Glassbreaks Sirens Relays vu E Speakers a E Video Accessories lt gt Expand Collapse Expand All Collapse All Selected Information Selected Part GE Security Parts List 3rd Party Parts List 2 Drag and drop the part from the tree to the parts list You can only add one part at a time you can not drag and drop folders Chapter 2 69 View tabs 3 The parts list will reflect the change Alliance Builder will not change the system layout graphic to reflect GE optional parts added to the parts list To change the system layout you must use the System layout tab To add required GE parts do one of the following e Add the device in the System bus layout tab Alliance Builder will update the parts list to reflect changes in the system layout e Or right click on the required check box of a part on the parts list to add a check to the box The system layout will not be changed Remove GE parts To remove an optional GE part do one of the following e Sele
220. l programming features Printers Printer programming not only configures a printer connected to the system but also dictates how and when the printer will output events In order to interface a printer to the control panel a printer computer printer interface board is required Programming The following programming options are available for printers Printer type Specify the type of printer connected to the interface board Table 17 details the printer types Table 17 Printer types Printer type Description Epson Baud 9600 Word 7 bit Parity Even Stop 1 Laser HPIl Baud 9600 Word 8 bit Parity None Stop 1 Laser HPII Baud 19200 Word 8 bit Parity None Stop 1 Epson Baud 9600 Word 7 bit Parity Odd Stop 1 Epson Baud 9600 Word 7 bit Parity None Stop 1 Epson Baud 9600 Word 8 bit Parity None Stop 1 Epson Baud 9600 Word 8 bit Parity Odd Stop 1 Epson Baud 9600 Word 8 bit Parity Even Stop 1 Printer time zone Range 0 to 64 includes hard and soft time zones Specify the time zone when the printer is active 170 Alliance Builder User Manual Real time printing If enabled the printer will print events as they occur otherwise they will not be printed Alarm events If enabled all alarm events will be printed otherwise they will not be printed Access control events If enabled all access control events will be printed otherwise
221. l relays to activate Area alarm control Zones can be configured to arm disarm assigned areas by authorized users Macros Macros can accept event flags as inputs within the logic equation Any of these inputs can correspond with zone event flags 238 Alliance Builder User Manual Programming The following programming options are available for zones Zone number Range 1 to 256 Specify which zone is being programmed Zone name Range Up to four text words and or four numbers Specify the name of the zone The name is converted into text words and is subsequently transferred to the control panel As a result the name will display in LCD RAS keypad devices Each zone name conforms to the following scheme where TW represents a text word and number represents an optional numeric value between 1 and 255 TWI1 number 1 TW2 number 2 TW3 number 3 TW4 number 4 Under this scheme it is possible to have up to four text words and four numbers When dealing with text words use single quotes when delimiting multi word text words Example Front Main Door 21 First Floor In this case the system will view the first series of characters as a single multi word text word When the system displays the full zone name it would appear as Front Main Door 21 First Floor Care should be taken when single quoting unique text The system only provides 100 custom user defined text words Reuse as many of the
222. lag is raised fire the relay Time zone Associate the relay with a time zone The time zone state will drive the relay System macro Relays are used as inputs in constructing the macro equation Siren tones Hard wired relays are used to produce different siren tones Programming The following programming options are available for relays Relay number Range 1 to 255 See Numbering on page 324 Specify which relay is being programmed Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Activated by event flag Range 1 to 255 Specify the event flag which when raised will cause the relay to become active This option assumes the time zone is not valid If the time zone is valid then the time zone state will drive the relay Inactive during time zone When the time zone is valid the relay is never activated When the time zone is invalid the event flag will drive the relay 232 Alliance Builder User Manual Time zone Range 0 to 64 Specify the time zone when the relay can be active or inactive When a time zone is valid and assigned to a relay the relay state is completely driven by the time zone state regardless of the event flag state When the time zone becomes invalid the relay is then driven by the event flag state Output inverted If enabled the overall logical result is reversed The relay is inact
223. late to the system and local buses The device tree in this tool contains all devices in the system layout graphic and indicates the devices supported by each DGP and control panel The tree indicates the relationships and ties between the devices as well as how the devices are organized in the enclosures This tool is a read only feature If you want to add edit or remove devices you must make the changes in the System bus layout tab Auto layout tool As you add and remove devices in the System bus layout tab the graphic can develop gaps and awkward spacing between elements Use the Auto layout tool to pull the graphic together eliminating and adjusting space between elements to ensure a clean and compact graphic Chapter 3 85 Alliance Builder tools Installer administration tool Use the Installer administration tool to add dealer setup information and to add edit and remove both installers and installer types Dealer setup tab Use the Dealer setup tab to add general information about the dealer that employs this installer The information entered here is typically used whenever forms are printed through Alliance Builder Fill in all applicable fields If a company logo is required to print on the forms use the browse button to locate the logo and import it into Alliance Builder The logo needs to have a white background A transparency cannot be used Click Clear logo to remove the imported logo and default to the GE Security log
224. lerk 049 Call 034 Clip 050 Calibration 293 Cold 051 Camera 035 Combination 052 Canteen 036 Commerce 428 Car 037 Commercial 053 Caroline 038 Communication 054 Cash 039 Compactor 055 Cash office 408 Computer 056 CCTV 040 Computer room 429 Ceiling 041 Conference 057 Cellar 042 Conference room 430 Central 043 Contact 058 Central bulk store 426 Control 059 Center 431 Corridor 299 Charge 045 Count 358 Chief 046 Counter 060 Cigarettes 047 Cover 325 City 048 Covered area 432 Class room 427 Covering 061 Cleaner 352 Curtain 522 Cleaner selling 411 Custody 269 Cleaner front 412 Customer 062 Appendix C Text word library D Dairy 274 Door 069 Dark room 433 Door keypad 543 Data 304 Doors 465 Delayed 063 Double 503 Desk 266 DOTL 275 Detector 064 Downstairs 070 Developmental 434 Driveway 071 DGP 065 Drug 072 Dining 066 Dry craft 436 Digital 296 DUALTEK 074 Dispatch 067 Duct 073 District facility 435 Dump 330 Dock 068 Duress 075 E Early 437 Enquiry 081 East 086 Entry 082 Education 438 Entry display area 440 Electric 077 Equipment 083 Electrical 078 Equipment store 441 Electronics 439 Evaluation 298 Emergency 079 Exit 084 Engineering 297 Exterior 085 End 080 External 086 311 312 Alliance Builder User Manual F Factory 08
225. lete project from the right click menu 2 Inthe Confirm project delete window make sure the Delete the project directory and all sub files directories check box is checked 3 Click Yes View project properties Project properties can be viewed and some properties can be changed from the Project list Any changes made to the properties will be reflected in the Project list To access project properties do the following 1 Right click the project name on the list 2 Select Properties from the right click menu to open the Project properties window Figure 13 38 Alliance Builder User Manual Figure 13 Project properties window Alliance Project 8 Properties General Customer Information Component Summary Firmware Alliance Project Software Platform Alliance Professional Software More advanced access intrusion m Project name Alliance Project 8 Project description New Alliance Project Installer name ALLIANCE INSTALLER Job number 1 Created 7 25 2005 5 05 41 AM Last modified 7 25 2005 5 05 50 AM Project ID 15d7a846 44dS 4beb ac37 0b9 1cfee 79 Directory C Documents and Settings Vinortis My Change directory Click to view bus thumbnail The Project properties window has the following tabs General Provides general information that can be changed such as the project name description job number and the project folder directory use the Chang
226. list See Organize the parts tree on page 71 for details Edit third party parts Use this dialog box to edit third party parts The Third party parts editor can also be accessed through the Parts list tab See Edit third party parts on page 72 for details Help The Help menu includes the following options Launch help Opens this Help program Visit Alliance on the web Provides a link to Alliance information on the web About Alliance Builder Provides copyright and historical information about Alliance Builder View tip of the day Select this option if you want to see the tip of the day when you open Alliance Builder Enable all context tip Select this option to enable all context tips Chapter 1 13 Introduction Toolbar The toolbar is located below the menu bar at the top of the program window Figure 4 Click an icon on the toolbar as a shortcut to dialogs and actions The toolbar only gives information and options for the currently selected control panel in the system layout In systems with multiple control panels you must ensure that the correct control panel is selected before using the toolbar see Current control panel tool on page 109 Figure 4 Toolbar Alliance Builder tools The top row of tools are used for programming functions that are not downloaded to the control panel These tools include e Device polling tool on page 80 e Enclosures tool on page 80 e As built tool on page 81 e Architecture view
227. list you must open the folders and add the parts one at a time You can not drag and drop folders from the parts tree to the parts list To organize the parts tree do the following 1 Click Organize third party parts Figure 23 2 To add a folder in the Organize part list dialog box click on the node where you would like the folder to be placed and click Add folder To remove a folder select the folder and click Delete folder 4 To move parts from one folder to another select the item and drag and drop it in the new folder 72 Alliance Builder User Manual 5 Click Close to exit the dialog box The changes made will be reflected in the Third party parts tree tab Edit third party parts To change a part number or description for a part do the following 1 In the left pane click Edit third party parts Figure 23 2 Inthe Custom parts editor dialog box select and overwrite the part number or description To remove a part select the part and hit the Delete key on your keyboard 4 To adda part click Add a new part and overwrite the default text in the part number and description columns 5 Click OK to exit the dialog box Add third party parts to a project To add a part do the following 1 Selecta part from the parts tree When a part is selected the description provided for that part will display in the Selected information field 2 Drag and drop the part into the parts list You can only add one
228. lliance Builder and is not intended to be modified by the user in any way Any modifications to the database and the data it contains could adversely effect projects that have been created in Alliance Builder or may even effect the overall operation of Alliance Builder itself CPD files Alliance Builder uses CPD files to store project programming information A CPD file is created for each control panel that is added to a project so there is a direct relation between the number of control panels in a system and the number of these files that exist for a project The files are stored in the project directory chosen when a new project is created and are managed by Alliance Builder CPD files should never be moved removed or edited by the user in any way All interaction with these files should occur automatically from within Alliance Builder APF archive files Alliance Builder 8200 APF archive files are used when exporting or importing projects Alliance Builder uses information stored in the MSDE database as well as information stored in the CPD files to create an APF archive The archives contain all necessary programming and project information for a project to be transferred to Alliance 8100 Chapter 16 275 Maintenance and support Alliance 8300 or another Alliance Builder 8200 If any information for a project is moved or removed from the database or if required CPD files are moved or removed the APF archive file will not be complete a
229. locking a door will open the door until locked again by a lock command either from the software program or an event that will lock the door Log off Logging off prohibits the use of the software program Log on Logging on is required before the software program can be used Enter your operator name and password to log on Logic equation A logic expression that combines macro inputs in a specific manner The result of a logic equation is called a macro output Macro input Each macro input is an event flag or output that is used in a logic equation Macro logic program A macro logic program is a set of rules that is created by macro inputs logic equations and macro outputs that is used to trigger event flags or zone inputs Macro output A macro output is the result of a logic equation The macro output can have a timing element and trigger event flags or zone inputs ormal When used in relation to a zone device the zone device is normal when it is not activated Online offline Operational Non operational A device may be offline due to a malfunction in the device itself or it may be disconnected from the control panel Table 58 Alliance Builder terms explained continued Term Definition Output Outputs provide physical contacts that can be used to activate LEDs relays etc An output can have two states active or not active Output control A PCB module that
230. logical relays used in macros For more information see Relays on page 230 Soft time zones Soft time zones similar to system macros are programmable logic that can be used to enable disable certain actions For more information see Soft time zones on page 233 Miscellaneous Control panel options Control panel options are a collection of options that will affect all related functionality in the system For more information see Control panel options on page 252 System event flags System event flags deal with system level events When the specified conditions occur the system will cause the programmed event flag to be raised For more information see System event flags on page 268 Event flag description Event flag descriptions are used to fully describe the meaning of the custom event flags They should be used so that any installer can easily understand the purpose behind each event flag especially when it comes to programmable logic Macros Event flag descriptions 1 to 16 are predefined and cannot be changed For more information see Event Flags on page 264 Custom LCD message The custom LCD message allows you to modify the text displayed on the RAS devices connected to the control panel For more information see Custom LCD message on page 263 Text words Text words are used to add descriptions to system components These descriptions can be downloaded to the control panel Up to 100 user defined text words can be
231. ly Arming station Also referred to as RAS devices arming stations can be LCD keypads readers or any other device that can be used to perform security functions such as arming disarming or opening doors 359 360 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 58 Alliance Builder terms explained continued Term Definition Badge A badge identifies a person to the Alliance system A badge typically has a unique identity number consisting of a badge number and site code The term badge also applies to a PIN because a badge does not have to be a physical device it can be a PIN only See Card Battery Back up power to prevent system failure in case of AC power trouble Battery test Periodic test of the battery to ensure proper functioning Bypassed A zone input has been excluded from functioning as part of the system and does not indicate normal or active status Card A card identifies a person to the Alliance system A card typically has a unique identity number consisting of a card number and site code See Badge Card active An active card can be used to gain access to doors or floors provided the door group allows access Card disabled A disabled card can not be used to gain access to doors or floors Central station A central station is a company that monitors whether an alarm has occurred in a security system A central station is located away from the building area it monitors Cloning
232. m options on page 258 programming must be enabled in order for this function to work correctly Arm and reset only Enabled Alarm control is restricted to only arming and reset functionality Disabled There are no alarm control restrictions The alarm system control option must be enabled in order for this function to work correctly 194 Alliance Builder User Manual Disarm only Enabled Alarm control is restricted to only disarming Disabled There are no alarm control restrictions The alarm system control option must be enabled in order for this function to work correctly Alarm reset only Enabled Alarm control is restricted to only resetting alarms Disabled There are no alarm control restrictions The alarm system control option must be enabled in order for this function to work correctly Auto bypass active zones Enabled When arming areas begins all zones in the active state are bypassed and the system is armed without generating any alarms Disabled The system cannot be armed if there are zones in the active state If this option is disabled and you would like to enable forced arming the forced arming option must be enabled Forced arming Enabled Areas assigned to the alarm group will be armed despite any zones that might be in the active state Disabled Areas assigned to the alarm group cannot be armed as long as there are zones in the active state When zones in the active
233. mber of doors and elevators that will need control devices as well as an idea of the required location and type of control and sensor devices This information will help determine the number of areas and zones needed for your project Company information Alliance Builder requires company information when you create a project This information will also be used on reports and forms generated by Alliance Builder The information includes the company name address phone number and contacts Project wizards and templates After you log on to Alliance Builder the program opens at the Project list tab see Project list tab on page 36 shown in Figure 11 on page 25 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 11 Project list tab Alliance Builder App Version v2 0 21 7 13 2005 Beta No Project Opened File Tools Parts Help K df En S Installer Admin 3 3 dressing E g a RH IN a AL 4017 1 1234567 8 9 10111213 141 ALIAS 6 78 910111213141516 A E ec is CH System Devices a Existing Project List 5 Data Gathering Panels Select an existing Project by clicking the Project Name from the list or create a new Project by clicking one of DGP Zone Expand the buttons below B ne Expanders B AL 1205 P AL 1210 Job number Project name Project description Created da PR a220 1 Alliance Project 8 New Alliance Project 7 25 2005 2 Door Elevator Controllers Bl AL 1255 P AL 1265 lE AL 1256 oO Point ID DGP UI aL 2
234. mcontrol tiers noci y a Tee SR ince A DUE dada awa 103 Diagnose tI ers uoo d ne wat an nk URP ERE ME TEMIR ed AM Ra er ERUqUES 104 RAS d6cess TIMENS SEENEN NON ME 104 ilr amice tA a een rm 105 Programming validator tool 106 Virtual relays tool 2r arr Leto er RR cee NEE RENE obs aw awa 107 DVMRs camera tool 108 Current control panel tool 109 DGP RAS numbering graphic 110 Alliance Builder User Manual Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 RAS programming features 25 542222544099 rra ea 111 RAS remote arming stations cece eee e eee ee eee eee e 112 TYPES 112 FUNCIONS ca Ee EEN 113 Programming EE 113 DGP programming features cese es sob arra 119 DGP data gathering panels 0 cece cece cece eect I 120 TOPES 120 FUNCIONS T A EESE 121 PF OCCU UIA Ges user epe eU RE rema etes EE da 122 4 door elevator controllers 0 cece cece e eee cece eee teen eee e eens 123 PURCHONS sso oso Ee ENEE Sale iib t ede abe temas e 124 Programtmlirig EE 124 Elevator programming optons 00sec cece eee eee ees 12 elle lle gel spun Em 129 ite te pp le d e RE RR ure eoo one itte oe bain REB 129 Point Re sg ad bete 130 Wireless DGP a 6 csekesciie het ER UROEEREEREERREERCEXEUER EAR ERR RE ERI 132 Programming EE 132 KEUTOD Progr ds cc A TEE 136 Door programming features oooooooommmmoo 137 DOOS AA Ae 138 Door RAS mumbering 9
235. med flags zone flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 16 Do not use 17 Do not use 18 24 hour local comms fail Generates a local alarm Activates an audible alert on all RAS assigned to the same areas Activates the fault LED on all RAS Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags none 347 348 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 57 Zone types continued Number and name Description 19 Comms fail LED Activates the fault LED on all RAS Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 20 Zone to event flag 24 When the zone is activated opened or shorted the zone event flag is hour activated Example Doorbell Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 21 Emergency door with a Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed but does not report it user code to the central station Generates an alarm when the area is armed Example Emergency door Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 22 Disarmed delayed with Generates an alarm when the area is disarmed but does not report to the autoreset armed alarm central station until the delayed alarm timer has expired or a second delayed alarm is activated If the zone closes to normal state during the delayed time it resets automatically Generates an alarm when the area is armed Example Delayed panic alarm button pressing a second panic alarm button will overrid
236. meras are divided into several categories and your application should drive your selection 3 The camera will be added to the Defined cameras for this DVMR tree and will be reflected in the Parts list 4 To add a description to a camera click the camera on the tree and overwrite the default text in the Description box in the Selected camera field The other information in the Selected camera field is read only and supplied by Alliance Builder 5 To remove a camera from the tree do the following 6 Select the camera on the tree 7 Right click the camera and select Remove camera Chapter 2 57 View tabs 8 Click Yes in the confirmation box The camera will be removed from the cameras tree and Parts list 9 Click Close to exit the window Alliance Builder User Manual Local bus layout tab After you have added a 4 door or 4 elevator controller DGP on the System bus layout tab double click the DGP graphic to invoke the Local bus layout tab Figure The Local bus layout will populate with the information for the selected DGP Figure 18 Local bus layout tab File Tools Parts Help T Take screenshot issues 77 AsBuit m Architecture View Ef Auto Layout 88 Installer Admin 22 Device Property Window Bs Esport y Show tooltips Programming Viewers Txt TextWords AS Event Flag Descriptions E Timers E Programming Validator Virtual Relays I DVMAs Cameras
237. ming Door reader programming Door hardware programming e EE 138 Alliance Builder User Manual Doors Doors are one of the most important concepts to understand within the Alliance system The terminology dealing with doors can present difficulties to installers and lead to confusion Although most systems define doors as keypad card reader devices RAS devices the Alliance system supports a maximum of 64 doors in a combination of up to 16 RAS devices and 48 intelligent doors System bus RAS devices are e Configured in the arming station e Considered doors only in door group programming and assigned a door number between 1 and 16 that reflects the RAS device s system bus address Intelligentdoors are e Comprised of one to four RAS devices per door connected to a 4 door elevator controller e Configured in door programming e Assigned door numbers between 17 and 64 in door access programming Another significant difference between a system bus RAS device and a door is the physical connection itself The system bus uses a proprietary bus format so non Alliance devices require an AL 1170 module interface For example it is impossible to add a standard Wiegand reader directly on the system bus it must be connected to an AL 1170 while the 4 door controller provides each door with a dedicated reader port that is capable of accepting either an Alliance or non Alliance reader device directly There is no need to add an AL 1170
238. n the device bus address of the parent device See Numbering on page 324 Logical A relay can be used within the system for logical purposes without any associated physical relay For example an event flag is raised due to a system macro which then causes the logical relay to go active This logical relay may then be used in soft time zone programming In this case there is no physical relay involved in the process In fact the relay can be viewed as a variable that is assigned a true false logic value Either a time zone or an event flag will drive the relay state In the case of event flags some relay numbers have associated hard wired event flags Relay numbers hard wired to event flags Table 27 lists the relay numbers hard wired to event flags Table 27 Relays hard wired to event flags Relay number Event flag 2 Event flag 2 strobe 3 Event flag 1 external siren 12 Constant DC voltage at the siren output 13 A warble tone at the siren output 14 A saw tooth tone at the siren output 15 Two tones at the siren output Event flag 13 internal siren 16 An inverted sawtooth tone at the siren output Event flat 1 control panel external siren 32 48 64 80 96 240 Event flag 1 DGP external siren Chapter 14 231 Zone and relay programming features Functions Relays can be used for the following functions Event flag Associate the relay with an event flag When the event f
239. n the display A remote is sent when the zone switches to its normal state Example Temperature alarm on a freezer Programming Program the zone event text word in System options programming Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag 58 Technical screen When the zone is activated opened or shorted it puts the zone event text on the display Example Temperature alarm on a freezer Programming Program the zone event text word in System options programming Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags zone flag Table 57 Zone types continued Appendix F Zone types Number and name Description 59 24 hour alarm if no time zone 41 If time zone 41 is invalid the zone generates an alarm regardless of the status of the area If time zone 41 is valid the zone is disabled Unless inverted when the output is activated the time zone is valid Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 60 Exit terminator This zone type is used to terminate the exit time If the zone switches from active to normal the exit time is terminated and the areas are completely armed Disarmed flags none Armed flags none 61 Do not use 62 Do not use 63 Do not use 64 Do not use 65 Engineer reset This zone type is used to perform an engineer reset When active an engineer reset will be performed on the area assigned
240. nal is reported to the central station Disabled Exit faults will not be reported to the central station Prevent arming if all zones bypassed Enabled The area cannot be armed if all zones in the area are bypassed Disabled The area can be armed if all zones in the area are bypassed Area disarm channel Program the channel for a disarmed event with channel numbers 00 99 for each area Leave blank to disable Area arm channel Program the channel for an armed event with channel numbers 00 99 for each area Leave blank to disable Alliance Builder User Manual Event flags External siren event flag When the area is armed the specified event flag is raised when a zone generates an alarm This will cause the external siren to sound The default is event flag 1 Disarmed event flag The specified event flag is raised when the area is disarmed Zone active event flag The specified event flag is raised when a zone assigned to the area becomes active Zones that can be used to change the status of an area cameras or unused zones are excluded Bypass event flag The specified event flag is raised when a zone assigned to the area has been bypassed Armed alarm event flag The specified event flag is raised when the area is armed Disarmed alarm event flag The specified event flag is raised when the area is disarmed Internal siren event flag When the area
241. nce parts list see Parts list tab on page 67 Most Alliance Builder properties are read only grayed out and cannot be changed Device properties Device properties are downloaded to the control panel These properties are set to defaults by Alliance Builder but can be programmed as required for your application In many cases this will be a combined list of categories in order to provide access to all relevant properties for a given device Figure 8shows the Device properties tab open on the System bus layout tab Figure 8 Device properties tree e AL 2017 Device Properties beem El Control Panel Macros E Control Panel macro configur El Control Panel Options Control panel address 1 Areas for total disarm ES None assigned Arm Disarm test mode No arm disarm test Clocked relay expanders 0 Zone event Textword xt None assigned Number alarm code prefix dic O Time before LCD rotate 8 LCD rotation speed 8 User offset 0 Duress mode Increment last digit z Description A non downloaded description given to this control panel Value New Control Panel Alliance Builder Properties Device Properties Chapter 1 19 Introduction There are several methods provided to change property values The type of programming feature and property value will determine the method used Double click menus Double click a property name to access a drop down navigation menu with various options to
242. nction except for the latched output function These rules apply to all examples except for example 8 the actual latched output function example Logical symbol input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 Output Logical equation Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Output 288 Alliance Builder User Manual Example 6 3 input AND gate 1 OR input combined Table 45 Example 6 Input OR AND Result 1 AND Input 1 AND 2 AND Input 2 AND 3 AND Input 3 have to activate simultaneously to trigger the output OR 4 OR input 4 can trigger the output directly The inputs are activated by an output relay activating or an event flag activating All inputs may be optionally individually inverted the NOT function Any unused inputs should be set to OR The logical equation can be combined with any output function except for the latched output function These rules apply to all examples except for example 8 the actual latched output function example Logical symbol input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 Output Logical equation Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Output Appendix A 289 Boolean logic Example 7 4 input AND gate Table 46 Example 7 ISLAND 1 AND Input 1 AND 2 AND Input 2 AND 3 AND Input 3 AND 4 AND Input 4 have to activate simultaneously to trigger the output The inputs are activated by an output relay activating or an event flag activating All inputs may be optionally indiv
243. nd 16th outputs are mapped to the siren output These outputs have priority 1 to 5 respectively Therefore output 12 will have a higher priority than output 16 when both are active thus generating a DC voltage at the siren output Table 33 shows the type of output generated when the programmable tones siren type option is selected different outputs are activated Table 33 Outputs generated Output Generates 12th Constant DC voltage at the siren output 13th A warble tone at the siren output 14th A saw tooth tone at the siren output 15th Two tones at the siren output 16th An inverted saw tooth tone at the siren output Alliance system code Range 0 to 65536 Specify an optional system code assigned to the control panel This code is only useful if the installer would like to make it difficult to perform engineering resets by the end users This code is input into an equation in order to generate the reset code Because the reset code is determined by two sets of values this option makes it much more difficult to perform and engineering reset and consequently add more security to the system System codes A and B Specify the system codes for this control panel The control panel will only accept user cards with these codes Type a code from 1 to 10 digits in length or type 0 zero to specify no code Chapter 15 257 Miscellaneous programming features There are two system codes A and B which allow
244. nd 30 bit For Wiegand 30 bit format Wiegand 32 bit For Wiegand 32 bit format Override time zone Range 0 to 24 Specify the time in which the door will unlock When the time zone is valid free access is allowed LED Chapter 7 Door programming features Specify how the reader displays the status LED Table 13 describes the LED status options Table 13 LED status options LED LED on when door locked Description The LED turns on when the door is locked LED on when door unlocked The LED turns on when the door is unlocked LED on when area armed The LED indicates if the area assigned to the door is armed If more than one area is assigned all areas must be armed before the LED changes LED on when area disarmed The LED indicates if the area assigned to the door is disarmed If more than one area is assigned all areas must be disarmed before the LED changes Two LEDs disarmed armed Readers with dual LED control lines connected indicate the area disarmed and armed with different color LEDs Two LEDs valid void Readers with dual LED control lines connected indicate user valid or void with different color LEDs No LED No LED control Note On readers with dual LED control lines the second LED can be programmed to indicate other conditions in DGP macro logic programming 151 152 Alliance Builder User Manual Reader options Hold
245. nd door group the door will open For example when enabled this option causes the door event flag to be raised which in turn opens the door Disabled Under the same scenario the door will not open Display shunted zones on RAS Enabled When a zone is shunted Zone shunted will appear on the display Disabled Nothing is displayed when the zone is shunted This option assumes the RAS device is an LCD keypad Arm disarm using one key Enabled Allows the user to arm or disarm an area by entering their user code and the area number without having to press ENTER on the keypad after selecting the area Disabled The user will need to press ENTER on the keypad after entering their user code to arm or disarm an area Chapter 5 117 RAS programming features Card auto disarm Enabled Badging cards disarms areas without using the OFF key Disabled Badging cards does not disarm areas Areas are disarmed manually This option assumes the RAS device is a card reader Disable status LEDs Enabled The card reader LEDs will be displayed when the control panel polls the RAS device Disabled Normal card reader LED function This option assumes the RAS device is a card reader Certain door reader settings override this function It may be necessary to alter the LED option in Door reader programming see LED on page 151 Card always arms disarms Enabled Badging a card reader allows arming disarming
246. nd will not contain all of the necessary project information Recommended practice Alliance Builder requires information stored in the MSDE database and the project CPD files to function correctly Alliance Builder manages this information and the location of these files so no user interaction is required Users should not modify or manipulate data stored in the MSDE database or project CPD files in any way A safe approach is to restrict users to only interact with Alliance APF archives Alliance APF archive files are intended to be moved or removed by the user and will not effect Alliance Builder operation and project integrity if they are manipulated 276 Alliance Builder User Manual Contacting technical support For assistance installing operating maintaining and troubleshooting this product refer to this document and any other documentation provided If you still have questions you may contact technical support during normal business hours Monday through Friday excluding holidays between 6 a m and 5 p m Pacific Time Table 36 Sales and support contact information Sales Technical support Phone Toll free 888 GESECURity 888 437 3287 in the US including Alaska and Hawaii Puerto Rico Canada Outside the toll free area 503 885 5700 E mail info gesecurity com generaltech ge com Fax 800 483 2495 541 752 9096 available 24 hours a day Note Be ready at the equipment before calling for techni
247. nge 0 to 14 Specify the voice message that has been programmed on the AL 7200 communications module to be used with this voice report The value of 0 zero specifies that no voice message should be used Description Add comments about the specified voice report This information is not downloaded to the control panel Chapter 13 Time and date programming features This chapter provides an overview of time and date programming features Hard time zones NENNEN Re NNN es 226 5010 E 228 226 Alliance Builder User Manual Hard time zones Hard time zones define periods of time including the time of day and the day of the week They are typically used to allow or prevent certain actions from taking place The control panel provides 25 hard time zones The first time zone Time Zone 0 is hard wired to 24 hours and cannot be changed The other hard time zones contain four sub time zones allowing different start end times as well as days of the week In addition each sub time zone allows inclusion of holidays above and beyond the times dates specified A time zone is considered active as long as one of the four sub time zones is valid If holidays are enabled for the time zone then it is possible for all four sub time zones to be invalid but the overall time zone to be active due to the current day falling on one of the defined holidays Functions Hard time zones can be used for the following functions Door group Dictate
248. ni 39 DOXLSCLV CE D 64 aliis c MM 324 O nul 230 CONDOM OTS ese Ete ee re NOR o HR 115 AAA riai a ETA 167 IVETTE scie E A I RR HQ programming ere s P PABX number oo onn ete ien dd 217 panel programming ccocccccncnnnnnncnananonanano canon nora cnnancncnnno 62 165 A a print ttl ad A O i 9 AI AAA tete pee een 32 129 TEMES eii teoria eere etd acis van eed eee 81 130 Pati tad 83 print TEE 30 Jesuit 169 EVDO sess 169 product info briefs cette ttbi 81 programming alarm group asii eec 63 191 alarm group restriction esses 63 198 area 63 179 GE 113 EE 63 201 battery test central station custom LCD message essen 65 263 door Hard WTC citant iaa 154 door TEA iii aede irae 150 door fIOOr BTOUD iiir it ras titii eee 157 UII 101 hard time zone sees etsi Eee tea 64 227 holiday iiu ate eee iSi tele 64 228 TACT ONOQUG E 166 NOXESCIVICES di e teer ei dd 64 209 printer remote arming Station 113 TEQUES Cialis 146 NEE 146 soft time ZONE iii Renten ERR 65 233 UT IP M C 64 210 DEE 102 UJ M X 95 programming checker esses 106 progr miming tab ient ertet reete renidet 62 programming viewer oO 95 project stilo 24 36 project Summa ceat neri dee 81 property WIndOW c
249. nly used in conjunction with Auto arm disarm programming Antimask event flag If an attempt to arm an area that has the anti mask event flag set to a non zero value and any inputs associated with this area are active the event flag is set for 5 minutes The antimask event flag is active for the duration of the timer and is reset when either the timer s time elapses or the area is successfully armed This event flag is commonly used with PIR detectors with an anti mask feature An output is assigned to the anti mask event flag that is wired to the detectors When this output is activated the detectors must be triggered by a walk test in order for them to become normal after the output is deactivated after 5 minutes Latched reset event flag This event flag is triggered when two valid disarm codes are entered within 5 minutes for an area and the area is disarmed The event flag is set for 5 seconds For an additional 4 seconds the zone 67 latched detector associated with the area is disabled for a total disabled time of 9 seconds Zone 67 is a 24 hour alarm conditional bypass that is conditional on the 9 second timer Alarm A event flag The specified event flag is raised when an area identifies a first alarm Alarm B event flag The specified event flag is raised when an area identifies a second alarm Tamper alarm event flag Unsupported 183 184 Alliance Builder User Manual Area links progr
250. ns will operate on related alarms 260 Alliance Builder User Manual Financial options Enabled Activates three special options generally applicable to financial institution installations 1 Film counters are enabled during the disarm test mode 2 Alarm group restriction 2 or alarm group restriction 6 disables delayed disarmed alarm zones See Alarm group restrictions on page 197 3 Minimum PIN code length is set to 5 digits Disabled System operation is normal Enable buzzer on AC line fault Enabled The keypad buzzer will be sounded when there is an AC line fault Disabled The keypad LED will flash upon an AC line fault Enable call central station display Enabled System LCD keypads indicate that the system has successfully reported and or is currently contacting the central station with the report of a burglar alarm or tamper activation Disabled System LCD keypads will not indicate successful burglar alarm or tamper activation reports to the central station Enable log limitations Enabled Limits the number of times a zone can log and report a change of state event within the same arm disarm cycle The zone log limit is set to three change of state event reports Disabled No limit is imposed on zone logging Indicate bypassed zones Enabled Alerts the user at the RAS device with an optical and audible indication that zones are bypassed in an area that is being armed The bypa
251. nt program to load the system to the control panel Check the system to see if additional programming is needed Make any required changes to the project in Alliance Builder Export the same project back to the software management program and load the system to the control panel 30 Alliance Builder User Manual Help The Help Viewer provides a navigation pane with the following tabs Contents tab Use the Contents tab to see a list of major categories of Help topics organized into books Double click a book to expand it into a list of topics Click a topic to open it in the topic pane Index tab Use the ndex tab to see the Help index Click an index entry to open a topic that contains information relating to the index entry If more than one topic is found a pop up selection window with a list of related topics will appear Click on a topic on the list to access that topic Search tab Use the Search tab to search the Help topics Glossarytab Use the Glossary tab to find definitions for words used in Alliance Builder You can Hide and Show the tabs by clicking the appropriate button Copy a topic In the topic pane of the Help Viewer right click inside the topic you want to copy and select the Select All option Inside the topic right click again and select Copy This copies the topic to the clipboard Click the location in your document where you want the information to appear In the Edit menu select Paste Note
252. ntinued Appendix E Zone event reporting Type number Class Sub class Condition cID SIA 32 24 hour alarms 24 hour 150 UA Alarm E150 QA 24 hour nonburg Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB Alarm restore R150 QR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU 33 24 hour alarms 24 hour 151 GA Alarm E151 QA gas detected Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB Alarm restore R151 OR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU 34 24 hour alarms 24 hour 152 ZA Alarm E152 QA refrigeration Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB Alarm restore R152 QR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU 35 24 hour alarms 24 hour 153 ZA Alarm E155 QA loss of heat Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB Alarm restore R153 OR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU 339 340 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 56 Zone event reporting continued Type number Class Sub class Condition ele SIA 36 24 hour alarms 24 hour 154 WA Alarm E154 QA water leakage Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB Alarm restore R154 OR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU 37 24 hour alarms 24 hour 155 QA Alarm E155 QA foil break Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB Alarm restore R155 QR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 QU 38 24 hour alarms 24 hour 156 UA Alarm E156 QA day trouble Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 QB
253. ntral station 1 during the text call interval otherwise the test call will be performed as specified regardless of events reported to the central station 212 Alliance Builder User Manual Chapter 12 Reporting programming features This chapter provides an overview of reporting programming features In this chapter LERTO HONOR eee eae ex oer EE ee ee ag 214 Reporling Glasses Lco ahd ceret Ce e d eR is 221 VOICE YOlOFHHE oes cen ees ce ee p RR RH e 223 214 Alliance Builder User Manual Central Station The system supports up to four different central stations each allowing a variety of different formats When certain events take place the central station configuration is used to determine if the events are reported and what format will be used Programming The following programming options are available for the central station Central station number Range 1 to 4 Specify the central station to program Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is only used by the management software First phone number Specify the main central station phone number Second phone number Specify the backup central station phone number System account number Range 4 to 6 digits enter 0000 if system event reporting is not required Specify the alarm system reporting to the central station The account number is used to identify system events not linked to an area Area account number 1 to 16
254. ntrol enabled in order to arm disarm areas Once a user either enters their PIN code at a keypad or badges their card at a reader depending on a combination of RAS alarm group options the system will arm disarm For example if a card reader with the card auto disarm option enabled and an assigned alarm group allowing alarm control is accessed by a user with equivalent privileges the system will disarm all areas that match between the two alarm groups Although many people consider keypads and card readers to be doors the system treats the first 16 devices on the system bus as simply RAS devices The system only considers RAS devices doors when they are connected to a 4 door controller local bus The main distinction between the two is the lack of intelligent capability found in the basic RAS device Basic RAS devices have no built in provisions for features such as antipassback request to exit and door shunting These are all features found within doors connected to 4 door controllers Types Alliance provides the following types of RAS devices Keypads Keypads arm and disarm areas and allow access through user PIN numbers Some keypad devices include an LCD display that can show information about the system such as when a zone is in alarm and also allow an installer to program the system Readers Readers arm and disarm areas and allow access through user cards The system supports Smart Card readers as well as mag swipe readers Interf
255. ny programming options a given function will only take place when the assigned time zone is valid invalid When the holiday becomes valid regardless of the days programmed within the time zone the overall time zone state becomes valid Functions Holidays can be used for the following functions Additional time zone parameter Provides an additional access parameter to the time zone If a time zone would normally be invalid a holiday could cause it to become valid if the current day matches the holiday Additional access parameter A user is normally denied access to a door when all existing time zones are invalid If the holiday is valid however access will be granted Programming The following programming options are available for holidays Holiday number Range 1 to 64 Specify which time zone is being programmed Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Date Specify the date given to the holiday Chapter 14 Zone and relay programming features This chapter provides an overview of zone and relay programming features In this chapter ror DP Sat tare ee wae Hane ted as 230 Alliance Builder User Manual Relays A relay can have one of the following forms Physical A physical relay can be found on some of the control boards as well as relay expander boards Each physical relay is numbered based o
256. ny unused inputs should be set to OR The logical equation can be combined with any output function except for the latched output function Logical symbol input 1 input 2 input3 input 4 output Logical equation Input input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Output 285 286 Alliance Builder User Manual Example 4 Combination not applicable do not use Table 43 Example 4 Input OR AND Result 1 OR If input 1 activates the output will be triggered 2 AND Input 2 NOT OPERATIONAL AND Input 3 NOT OPERATIONAL 4 AND Input 4 NOT OPERATIONAL Do not use this combination The exact logical equation with different inputs can be achieved by the combination in example 6 Logical symbol input 1 input 2 input 4 input 3 output Logical equation Input 1 Output Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Not operational Note Alliance Builder cannot perform this combination Appendix A 287 Boolean logic Example 5 2 input AND gate 2 input OR gate combined Table 44 Example 5 Input OR AND Result 1 AND Inputs 1 and 2 must activate simultaneously to trigger the output OR 2 AND 3 OR Input 3 OR 4 OR Input 4 will trigger the output The inputs are activated by an output relay activating or an event flag activating All inputs may be optionally individually inverted the NOT function Any unused inputs should be set to OR The logical equation can be combined with any output fu
257. o Installers tab Select the Installers tab to add edit or remove installers The tab provides a list of all existing installers with the following details Login name The login name can be a unique company code or ID number and is limited to 16 characters entered as uppercase letters Description The installer type in the description box dictates the functionality and permissions for the installer Project directory The default directory indicates where project files will be stored for this installer Add installers To add installers to the list do the following 1 Click Add 2 When the New edit installer window appears fill in the installer name a unique login name or code first and last name the installer s real name phone number mobile phone number email address password and confirm password Select the installer type from the drop down list 86 Alliance Builder User Manual 3 If the installer type selected permits the installer to create projects indicate in the project directory where the project files for this installer should be stored 4 Click OK 5 The installer will be added to the installers list 6 Click Close to exit the tool Edit installers Although you can edit information for all installers you can only edit the password or directory information for Alliance Installer All other information for Alliance Installer cannot be changed To edit an existing installer s information
258. ocumentation do the following 1 Right click the panel on the tree 2 Select one of the following options from the drop down menu e What s this e View installation manual e View programming manual e View product datasheet e Delete control panel When you have more than one control panel in a project you must always be aware of which control panel is currently selected All programming options and graphics will reflect the currently selected control panel You cannot use this tab to change the currently selected control panel you must use the Current control panel tool on page 109 Chapter 2 47 View tabs Add system devices To add a system device to the layout graphic open the Device tree tab Figure 16 Click on the device in the system bus devices list and drag and drop it onto the layout graphic This will place the device on the graphic and Alliance Builder will set the device address and default properties Some devices require enclosures and other properties to be selected before they can be added to the layout When you select one of these devices a dialog box opens and you must supply the required information before the device is added to the layout Figure 16 Device tree tab 97 System Devices System Bus Devices ELO Data Gathering Panels 8 1 DGP Zone Expanders E aam E aL2210 E aL2220 Point ID DGP E aL1291 ELO Wireless DGP d AL 1231 ED RAS CH Keypads IS AL 1
259. ogramming and RAS programming For example the door event flag option in RAS programming is raised whenever the RAS device grants access to a user Event flag description Event flag descriptions are used to fully describe the meaning of the custom event flags They should be used so that any installer can easily understand the purpose behind each event flag especially when it comes to programmable logic Macros Chapter 15 267 Miscellaneous programming features Functions Event flags can be used for the following functions Readability Event flag descriptions make it easier for installers to read understand the event flag General programming While setting up the system numerous programming options offer the ability to choose an event flag The process of assigning an event flag for these options is significantly easier when you have a clear description of the event flag rather than just an event flag number Programming The following programming options are available for event flags Event flag number Range 1 to 255 Specifies which event flag is being programmed Description A 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software 268 Alliance Builder User Manual System event flags System event flags deal with system level events When the specified conditions occur the system will cause the programmed event flag to be raised The sys
260. oject configuration Only the programming choices that are available for your project are shown To assign a programming option to the selected property most editors provide a list of options that you can either double click or select and click OK Property editors include Alarm groups editor Assign an alarm group from the list See also Alarm groups on page 188 for more information Event flag description Assign an event flag description form the list Event flag descriptions are programmed in the Event flag descriptions tool on page 101 Hard soft time zone editor Assign an existing time zone from the list Hard time zones and soft time zones are programmed in the Control panel programming tab on page 62 Relay editor Assign a relay from the list Relays are programmed in the Control panel programming tab on page 62 See Relays on page 230 for more information Reporting class The reporting class editor provides a tree of 8 reporting classes with 6 conditions for each Select a condition and then check the applicable reporting boxes See Reporting classes on page 221 for more information Text word editor Assign a text word from the text word library See Text words on page 271 for more information Floors editor Assign an existing floor from the list Floors are programmed in the Control panel programming tab on page 62 Macro editor Assign macros for control panels and 4 door elevator controllers You can create new macros
261. on Siren Some DGP devices are equipped with their own siren which will sound when one of the zones goes into alarm Zone relay expansion Most DGP devices can support up to 32 zones through expansion some DGPs such as the 4 door controller do not support zone expansion Relay expansion is typically limited to 16 relays two 8 way relay expansion boards Redundant databases Some DGP devices such as the 4 door controller maintain an independent database from the control panel If the system bus is severed the device does not have to communicate with the control panel in order to grant access to a user Bus address A DGP is assigned a bus address that in turn determines the zone relay numbering Localized wiring DGP devices provide the capability to install zones relays and power to a location that is a substantial distance from the control panel This allows fewer wires to be run and localized power and battery backup to be used Doors floors Some DGP devices provide additional intelligent functionality such as the 4 door and 4 elevator controllers 122 Alliance Builder User Manual Programming The following programming options are available for DGP devices DGP number Range 1 to 15 for a 4 door elevator controller DGP the range is 1 to 12 Specify which DGP is being programmed the system bus address Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and
262. ontains a list of the control panels in the project Device tree tab The Device tree tab contains a list of system devices and a list of ancillary devices that you can add to the system layout by dragging and dropping Only those devices supported by the current control panel and your software platform will be available in the device tree Properties tab The Properties tab includes both properties that are set by Alliance Builder and properties that you can change for the selected device Return view tab The Return view tab returns you to the System bus layout tab from the Local bus layout tab or the Control panel programming tab 45 46 Alliance Builder User Manual Control panel tab Use the Control panel tab to see what control panels are currently in your project You can also use the tab to add and delete control panels from your project and view control panel documentation To add a control panel to the list do the following 1 Right click the Project control panels folder 2 Selecta control panel from the list Figure 15 Figure 15 Control panel tree g Control Panels BEBE Proiect Cot add contol Pane E Bl AL4017 1 AL 3017 AL 2017 AL 4617 3 Use the Enclosure selection dialog box to choose the appropriate enclosure and additional parts for the selected control panel and click OK The layout graphic will reflect the new control panel and its system bus To delete a control panel or to view control panel d
263. ontrol panel programming tab on page 62 To add the programming associated with zones do the following 1 Program the alarm groups see Alarm groups on page 188 and Control panel programming tab on page 62 Program the time zones see Hard time zones on page 226 and Control panel programming tab on page 62 Program the zones see Zones on page 236 and Control panel programming tab on page 62 Chapter 1 27 Introduction If the number of zones is not sufficient add required DGP devices or zone expander devices see System bus layout tab on page 44 Program the DGP Alliance Builder properties then the zone programming for each DGP device see System bus layout tab on page 44 Program the relays see Relays on page 230 and Control panel programming tab on page 62 Add items from the GE parts list to ensure the number of zones equals the number of detection sensors see Parts list tab on page 67 Add speakers and accessories see Parts list tab on page 67 28 Alliance Builder User Manual Import export projects All projects created in Alliance Builder have a unique identifier called a GUID global unique identifier This identifier provides a mechanism to synchronize projects while ensuring that two project numbers cannot point to the same deployed system For example if an installer creates a project and the project is later modified When the project is imported back into Alliance Builder the program will fin
264. oor elevator controller has card reader input capabilities with a maximum of 16 readers Each of the four doors can have up to four card readers Of these four readers two will be in readers and two will be out readers Table 54shows the readers associated with each door Notice that the reader numbers for each door are not sequential For example Door 1 has reader numbers 1 5 9 and 13 Table 54 Door card reader numbering Door number IN reader IN reader OUT reader OUT reader 1 Door 1 5 9 13 2 Door 2 6 10 14 3 Door 3 T 11 15 4 Door 4 8 12 16 332 Alliance Builder User Manual RAS numbering Relay output control group numbering Relay control group numbers are a way to identify a group of 8 relays outputs controlled by a RAS device When a relay control group is assigned to a RAS device the open collector relay OUT terminal follows the first relay of the relay control group Table 55 illustrates the relay control group numbering details Table 55 Relay control group numbering Relay number Relay number 2 9 18 137 3 17 19 145 4 25 20 153 5 33 21 161 6 41 22 169 7 49 23 177 8 57 24 185 9 65 25 193 10 73 26 201 11 81 27 209 12 89 28 217 13 97 29 225 14 105 30 233 15 113 31 241 16 121 32 249 Appendix E Zone event reporting This appendix provides a table of the repor
265. oor or elevator Use the methods detailed in Property programming on page 18 to program the options If you need more information about programming options see Doors on page 138 and Elevator programming options on page 127 When you are finished adding and programming doors and devices to the DGP select the Return view tab on the left pane to return to the System bus layout tab 62 Alliance Builder User Manual Control panel programming tab To access the Control panel programming tab Figure 20 double click the control panel graphic on the system bus layout Use the Control panel programming tab to program most system programming features The available features are accessed through category buttons at the bottom of the window Figure 20 Control panel programming tab File Tools Parts Help 7 ei Take screenshot ue 77 AsBuit TE Architecture View ET Auto Layout B Installer Admin E Device Property Window Export v Show toolti shall Programming Viewers TxtTextwords Ls Event Flag Descriptions DI Timers Ef Programming Validator Virtual Relays B DVMAs Cameras Current Control Panel AL 4617 1 7 View All DGP Ke 3 4 56 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 RAS ob 34 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16 E Control Panel Programming Parts List HE Wiring Diagrams Ch Battery Calc fir Cable Calc G 7 Selected programming O Auto ArmoDisarm Programming frost Control Panel
266. option to function Passback choices include No antipassback No control for passback A valid card PIN opens the door without generating an alarm Entering a region twice without leaving is possible Soft antipassback A valid card PIN opens the door when used to enter the region the second time without leaving the first but a report is generated Hard antipassback A valid card PIN does not open the door when used to enter the region a second time without leaving the first A report is generated 144 Alliance Builder User Manual Door options Card plus PIN IN reader Enabled In order to open the door from the IN reader the user must badge their card and enter their PI Disabled In order to open the door either badge their card or enter thei on the keypad from the IN reader the user must r PIN on the keypad Card plus PIN OUT reader Enabled In order to open the door badge their card and enter their PI Disabled In order to open the door either badge their card or enter thei D rom the OUT reader the user must on the keypad from the OUT reader the user must r PIN on the keypad IN reader no PIN if time zone Enabled In order to open the door from the IN reader during the low security time zone only a valid card is required Disabled In order to open the door security time zone a valid card or a from the IN reader during the low valid PIN is required OUT reader no
267. or controller can be done from the System bus layout tab you can also access the same programming from the Local bus layout tab Use the Click to view 4 door controller properties link at the top of the local bus graphic to populate the selected properties options with information for the DGP Use the methods detailed in Property programming on page 18 to program the options Program door properties Use the Click to setup door link at the top of each door graphic to program door properties for each door Use the methods detailed in Property programming on page 18 to program the options If you need more information about programming options see Doors on page 138 When you are finished adding and programming doors and devices to the DGP click Return view on the left pane to return to the system layout graphic Add elevators to a 4 elevator controller You can add doors elevators with card readers and keypads to the DGP on the Local bus layout tab Select a door elevator from the Doors elevators list on the Add remove doors tab and drag and drop it on the Local bus layout graphic To remove a door elevator from the graphic click Remove door elevator for the number you want to remove Card readers and keypads To add local bus devices to a door elevator use the Readers list tab Select a device from the device tree and drag and drop it in the graphic Note that the first device on each door elevator must be a card reader To view propert
268. overview of control panels and control panel programming features In this chapter LOL BHA Lusso ex es EE qoe e qoas 160 Macro LOGIC back ens claw ghd cer eee IC oe PEER qus 166 PTI czoeesesheseere 4 eo ERA EH Ie A ees 169 TORES ege coacta Ee OON Keb able exact ees 171 160 Alliance Builder User Manual Control panel The Alliance system is based on the Alliance control panel The control panel is responsible for managing the vast majority of the security system The control panel Communicates with all system bus devices ensuring that the devices are responding correctly as well as gathering status information Maintains user database and associated databases Communicates to PC management software through a variety of physical mediums such as RS232 and PSTN Provides expandable resources such as users and alarm groups through memory modules Reports alarms to central stations through on board dialers Controls hardware such as opening doors and bypassing zones Supports external printers added to the control panel through additional board interfaces mounted on the panel allowing certain events to be logged in real time The control panel maintains the vast majority of programming options available For example the control panel handles adding removing keypads to the system bus via keypad management software See RAS remote arming stations on page 112 Control panel features Table 14 shows the features provided by
269. ow you want to view the list If you select DVMR cameras you will get a list that includes the item description DVMR number camera number and preset number You must use the System bus layout tab to add DVMRs to the system and program the cameras see Add cameras to a DVMR on page 56 Chapter 4 109 Panel device tools Current control panel tool The Current control panel tool Figure 26 includes the following options Control panel Select the control panel you want to program from the drop down list View all View a list of all control panels for the current project along with related device totals for each control panel Figure 26 Current control panel tool Current Control Panel aL20171 r Mewan Since Alliance systems can have up to seven individually programmed control panels it is very important to always know which control panel is currently selected In systems with only one control panel this will not be an issue Alliance will automatically name the first control panel you add to the system Control Panel 1 That control panel will remain selected until another control panel is added to the system For systems with multiple control panels the information shown in the menus toolbar tabs and status bar will reflect only the information for the control panel indicated in the current control panel field To add or remove control panels from the project see Control panel tab on page 46 110 Alliance Build
270. pacing after you remove devices Add ancillary devices Ancillary devices are used to expand the functionality of your system To access these devices open the Device tree tab Ancillary devices are categorized by their size as shown in the card size code area below the ancillary device list Installation of ancillary devices adheres to the following logic Occupied locations Alliance Builder keeps track of installed devices and prohibits new devices from being placed in the same locations Physical fit Alliance Builder searches to see if a location is available in the enclosure that matches the size of the device being placed Device type Alliance Builder determines whether the type of ancillary device being added exceeds the number allowed under the system s electronic and firmware rules System input output maximums Alliance Builder will not allow placement of a device if the addition of the device will cause the system to exceed the maximum number of zones or relays allowed as shown in the status bar You can add an ancillary device to an existing enclosure or directly onto the system layout size 1 and 2 devices only Add ancillary devices to an existing enclosure Select the device in the ancillary device list and drag and drop it into an existing enclosure on the system layout Each enclosure has a maximum number of ancillary devices that it can accommodate This number depends not only on the number of card locations in the
271. part at a time you can not drag and drop folders from the parts tree Remove third party parts from a project To remove a part do the following 1 Select a part in the parts list You can only remove one part number at a time 2 Hitthe Delete key on your keyboard User defined parts list The User defined parts list tab provides a place to add any required additional text The text box allows you to create a column of text that you can add edit and delete Any information Chapter 2 73 View tabs added in the text box will print with the other parts lists and will be part of the As built report The left pane is not used and is not available from this tab To add an item do the following 1 Click Add new item 2 Type the text in the new item line in the Description text box To edit an item do the following 1 Select the item line in the Description text box 2 Type the new information in the item line To delete an item do the following 1 Select the item line in the Description text box 2 Click Delete selected item Print the parts list To print the parts list use the As built tool on page 81 74 Alliance Builder User Manual Wiring diagrams tab The Wiring diagrams tab provides a technical point of reference for the configuration and wiring of all devices in your project The diagrams will reflect your project settings and the programming you have completed in Alliance Builder The diagrams includ
272. project information specific to this project including the job ID and a project description if required Click Next Enter customer information Enter the customer information specific to this project including the customer name phone number and address Click Next Template type Select the type of source template you want to use for the project by choosing one of the following options Select a GE Security default program as a starting point for your new project If you select this option do the following Click Next the wizard provides a list of GE templates Select a template category from the drop down list and select a template from the list of templates in that category A device totals list will display for the selected template system as well as a brief overview description See Templates on page 42 for a complete list of the available templates e To get a list of the attributes for the control panel in the selected system click Tell me about this control panel The Control panel summary window details the control panel attributes and limits Click Next to accept the selected template Create a new project based on a previously designed project If you select this option do the following Click Next the wizard provides a list of existing projects Select a project from the list for your template and click Next Completed wizard Click Finish to complete the wizard The new project is added to the existin
273. r PSTN In the case of PSTN the control panel must have the on board dialer configured with the appropriate telephone lines while the RS232 option requires outfitting the control panel with an optional Computer Printer Interface Module Printing As events occur they can be logged to an optional printer The printer is connected to the control panel through optional interface boards such as the Computer Printer Interface Module 163 164 Alliance Builder User Manual Functions Control panels can be used for the following functions RAS DGP communication All RAS DGP devices communicate with the control panel over the system bus These devices obtain data from the control panel provide status information as well as generate alarms Software communications Alliance management software communicates directly with the control panel in order to monitor events perform device control i e unlock doors and program users This is accomplished over several communications options including RS232 and PSTN User database Authorized users are stored within the control panel RAS devices connected to the system bus will obtain authorization when a PIN card is presented from the control panel Smart card devices will buffer a limited number of users in their respective memory In the event a bus failure occurs a card is likely to function RAS devices attached to 4 door controllers obtain user information from the door controller rat
274. r a DGP will be address 2 Table 50 Example 1 Address Zones 2 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 3 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 4 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 5 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 6 97 98 99 100 101 102 105 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 7 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 125 124 125 126 127 128 8 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 9 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 10 161 162 165 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 11 177 178 179 180 181 182 185 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 12 195 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 13 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 14 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 15 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 Appendix D 327 Numbering Example 2 If a DGP with an 8 zone expansion module is added to the control panel the DGP will consume the 16 zones in address 2 zones 33 through 48 and the first 8 zones in address 3 zones 49 through 56 Zones 57 through 64 will
275. r are armed If enabled a valid card PIN will not open a door if any of the areas assigned to the door are armed If disabled the door will open regardless of the area s armed status The areas mentioned here do not come from the alarm group rather they come from the areas listed in the Area option in Door hardware programming see Areas on page 156 150 Alliance Builder User Manual Door reader programming The following programming options are available for the door reader feature Cardformat Specify the card key token reader data format when not using IUM memory Table 12 describes the various formats Table 12 Card formats Format Description Wiegand 27 bit For Indala ESP range of proximity readers supplied by Aritech Aritech ASC For AL 1191 proximity readers Kastle 32 bit Kastle format cards Wiegand 26 bit For standard 26 bit Wiegand format readers including Wiegand swipe readers supplied by Alliance Have a 16 bit card number 0 65534 and an 8 bit system code 0 255 Indala ASC 27 bit For Indala ASP range of proximity readers using 27 bit Wiegand format Indala ASC 26 bit Not used in Europe Wiegand 32 bit For 32 bit Wiegand format readers Uses a 16 bit card number and 16 bit system code Mag Card Alliance For Alliance format magnetic swipe cards Mag Card Midas For Midas format magnetic swipe cards C36 bit For C36 bit format Wiega
276. r number Specify the zone used for the door contact This zone lets the 4 door elevator controller know when a door is opened closed especially during a forced door condition Monitor second door zone Range depends on 4 door elevator controller address and door number If enabled the system will treat the spare zone as a second door contact otherwise the spare zone is available for other purposes Shunt zones Specify which zones assigned to the current door require shunting This zone is typically the door contact zone Interlock zones Specify which door contact zones should be used in order to prevent doors from being accessed at the same time when door are on separate door controllers 156 Alliance Builder User Manual For example to interlock Door 1 with Door 2 a contact on Door 2 must be wired to the spare zone on Door 1 and a contact on Door 1 must be wired to the spare zone on Door 2 The spare zone becomes the interlocking zone If a zone is being used for interlocking and no other door uses it for the door contact zone this should be the case then the 4 door elevator controller will insert a 2 second delay before opening the door in order to allow for settling times A maximum of eight zones can be used for interlocking Areas Specify the areas used by the door reader s LED options alarm control entry denied if area armed and IN OUT RTE disabled The 4 door elevator controller will look at the spec
277. r zones on the control panel and the DGP devices activate the siren and the strobe when in alarm Disabled The dedicated tamper zones do not activate the siren and strobe when in alarm Latching systems alarms Enabled System alarms latch and require a code to reset them This ensures that users who have the appropriate authority are assigned an alarm group that has reset system alarms enabled in Alarm groups programming Disabled System alarms automatically reset and report the restore when the alarm condition is no longer present System alarms include RAS arming station or DGP offline cabinet tamper siren tamper AC fail fuse fail and low battery Chapter 15 259 Miscellaneous programming features Siren testing Enabled Enables a siren test for three seconds when the arm test is started Disabled Sirens are not tested when the arm test is started Refer to Siren type option Disable O ENTER for camera reset Enabled Users cannot enter 0 ENTER on an LCD keypad to stop cameras operating The cameras continue to operate until someone who is authorized to control cameras resets them Disabled When a user enters 0 ENTER on an LCD keypad the camera operating is stopped Disable insert of alarm group restriction Enabled Disables the option to treat areas as vaults By disabling this option the non vault areas will not be automatically armed Disabled Ability to treat areas as vaults
278. rasonic 245 Upper 246 Under 512 Upstairs 247 Unit 513 V Valve 248 Ventilator 251 Vault 249 Video 252 Vault RAS bank 1 540 Voltage 253 Vault RAS bank 2 541 Volumetric Vent 250 Appendix C Text word library W Wall 254 Wired grid 258 Warehouse 255 Women s 259 West 256 Wood workshop 516 Wet craft 515 Work room 517 Window 257 Workshop 260 Y Yard 261 Z Zone 262 321 322 Alliance Builder User Manual Appendix D Numbering This appendix provides an overview of Alliance system numbering In this appendix kl f a cH Bee WE a lw ears 324 4 door elevator controller eee 329 BAS DUNDER EEN es ey ese p Ea PI danas 332 324 Alliance Builder User Manual Numbering Although Alliance Builder can handle the addressing numbering for you a basic knowledge of the numbering scheme will make programming the system and understanding the restrictions easier Alliance systems can be very large and system components must be set up to function together The system addressing and numbering scheme is an essential element in this process It is important to understand the difference between addresses and numbers and how they relate to each other Addresses Assigned to control panels DGP devices and RAS devices Numbers Assigned to zones inputs and relays outputs on a device and are directly tied to the address of that device
279. re the system will use the longest time associated with the zone For example if an entry exit zone is assigned to areas 1 through 3 and the zone is in alarm the system will use the longest entry exit time defined within those three areas Event flags and zones are closely linked When a zone goes into alarm the assigned zone event flag is raised This event flag may be used in a variety of ways depending on the required functionality A typical use is to associate the event flag with a relay When the zone goes into alarm the event flag is raised and trips the relay Each zone provides numerous system wide event flags that can be raised during an alarm These include e nternal external siren e Keypad buzzer e Armed disarmed alarm Text words are used in defining the zone name Unlike numerous other program elements zone name text words are downloaded to the panel LCD keypads will use these text words when displaying the zone names When used effectively this makes it very easy to identify zones from keypads or through management software Functions Zones can be used for the following functions Central station Zones can be configured to notify programmed central stations during alarm condition Event flags When a zone goes into alarm the assigned zone event flag is raised along with numerous other system level event flags Relays Along with the event flags zones can be programmed so that the state will cause physica
280. region When used in conjunction with antipassback programmed in Door access programming see Passback on page 143 users can be prevented from accessing the same reader twice or access may be granted but a report will be generated Functions Regions can be used for the following functions Establish boundaries Regions set up boundaries when used in conjunction with the antipassback feature For example a user can be denied access at the same reader they have already used to enter the region Monitor user location When a user is granted access at a door supporting regions the region number is added to the report Programming The following programming options are available for regions Region number Range 0 to 255 Specify which region is being programmed Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Chapter 10 Alarm control programming features This chapter provides an overview of alarm control programming features In this chapter ALO PIOUS Qu Sete ces EEN oed soe aan Alarm group restrictions cesses ees Automatic arm disarm Automatic PESC cocina Dead ee Dee ea Gnas cs 188 Alliance Builder User Manual Alarm groups Alarm groups define alarm control for the Alliance system This impacts users doors zones as well as RAS devices An alarm group is assigned to each RAS device in the syst
281. reporting code is a reflection of the zone type that is sent to the central station Assigned areas Areas assigned to the zone The properties shown in the viewer are programmed in the Control panel programming tab For information on all zone programming options see Zones on page 236 Relays viewer This tab shows the following basic relay properties programmed in the project Number Relay number Type Physical or virtual Description Relay description Event flag Event flag that will activate the relay Time zone Time zone 0 to 64 when the relay can be active or inactive The properties shown in the viewer are programmed in the Control panel programming tab For information on all relay programming options see Relays on page 230 Chapter 4 97 Panel device tools Relay control groups viewer This tab shows information for all relay control groups currently defined for your project The list will show if there are any duplicate relay control groups assigned to more than one RAS device RAS address The address of the RAS associated with the relay control group Description Relay control group description Relay number The relay number of the first relay of the relay control group Event flag The event flag activated for the relay Click on a sub item to see the RAS devices programmed for that relay To remove a relay control group select the line on the list and use your delete key This is the only way to remove a rela
282. resses for all point ID devices in the project Wireless serial number summary Provides a table with the serial number for all wireless devices in the project Video integration summary Provides tables of all TCP IP video equipment such as DVMRs and cameras as shown in the DVMRs cameras tool Parts list Lists all parts for the project shown in the Parts list tab You can choose to have the parts separated into two tables Alliance parts and third party parts or you can choose to have them combined into a single parts table Battery calculations Battery requirement calculations as for your project devices 81 82 Alliance Builder User Manual Cable calculations Cable length requirements as calculated in the Cable calculation tab Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams for all devices in the system as shown in the Wiring diagrams tab You can choose to have the diagrams print in high or low resolution Selecting high resolution can greatly affect the quality of the print but will also greatly increase the size of the print file You can also choose to include a door relay and zone index Page setup options You can choose what type of branding you want the As built report to show If you select Use standard GE Security name logo the report will print with the GE name and logo on every page If you want to have a different company name and logo on the report select Use dealer company name logo if defined The logo must be de
283. restriction provides an option to disarm the area for a specified period of time Under normal circumstances this time comes from programming in Timers on page 171 If the time is set in this option to any value other than zero it will override the value programmed in Timers programming If the alarm group restriction disarmed time in Timers programming is set to zero in order to specify that the area will not rearm the time set here will apply for the area Reporting options Chapter 9 181 Access programming features Report to central station 1 Enabled Reports opening closing and late to close access events to central station 1 Disabled Does not report to central station 1 Report to central station 2 Enabled Reports opening closing and late to close access events to central station 2 Disabled Does not report to central station 2 Report to central station 3 Enabled Reports opening closing and late to close access events to central station 3 Disabled Does not report to central station 3 Report to central station 4 Enabled Reports opening closing and late to close access events to central station 4 Disabled Does not report to central station 4 Enable audio listen in Not supported in the US Enabled Audio listen in will be enabled Disabled Audio listen in will be disabled Report exit faults Enabled On an exit fault a local alarm is generated and a special exit fault sig
284. rglar 131 BA Alarm E131 BA perimeter Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 BB Alarm restore R131 BR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 BU 19 Burglar Burglar 132 BA Alarm E132 BA interior Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 BB Alarm restore R132 BR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 BU 335 336 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 56 Zone event reporting continued Type number Class Sub class Condition ele SIA 20 Burglar Burglar 133 BA Alarm E133 BA 24 hour Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 BB Alarm restore R133 BR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 BU 21 Burglar Burglar 134 BA Alarm E134 BA entry exit Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 BB Alarm restore R134 BR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 BU 22 Burglar Burglar 135 BA Alarm E135 BA day night Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 BB Alarm restore R135 BR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 BU 23 Burglar Burglar 136 BA Alarm E136 BA outdoor Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 BB Alarm restore R136 BR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 BU Table 56 Zone event reporting continued Appendix E Zone event reporting Type number Class Sub class Condition cID SIA 24 Burglar Burglar 137 BA Alarm E137 BA ad Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 BB Alarm restore R137 BR Tamper restore
285. ricted Rights clause at Federal Acquisition Regulations 52 227 19 and the restrictions as provided in subparagraphs c 1 and c 2 thereof and as applicable the Government s rights to use modify reproduce rel ease perform displau or disclose the Software also are restricted as provided by paragraphs b 2 and b 3 of the Rights in Noncommercial Technical Data and Computer Soft ware Small Business nnovative Research SBIR Program clause at DFARS 252 227 7018 The manufacturer of the Licensed Product is GE Security Inc 12345 SW Leveton Drive Tualatin OR 97062 YOU ACKNOWLEDGE BOUND BY ITS TERMS THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO BE D PERFORMANCE OF YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND GE SECURITY AND SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT ORAL OR WRITTEN AND ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT Use this product only for the purpose it was designed for refer to the data sheet and user documenta tion For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online at www gese curity com iv Alliance Builder User Manual Contents Chapter 1 dijo fe rr M aN 1 Conventions used in this document 2 Safety terms and symbols 2 e ol ocius A SI RE dan 3 Alliance Builder overview
286. rm group The one exception to the second rule is if the alarm group enables any of the following options disarm only arm reset only or alarm reset only in Alarm groups programming In this case the areas in the restriction do not need to match those defined in the alarm group If there are areas assigned to the alarm group but not to the restriction they will have standard system control functions as specified in the alarm group Example 1 Cleaners are only allowed to arm reset areas 1 2 and 3 They are not allowed to disarm any of these three areas They can however disarm area 4 The implications are e An alarm group exists defining areas 1 2 3 and 4 and is assigned to the cleaners e This alarm group enables alarm group restriction 1 which has been configured to only allow arm reset for areas 1 2 and 3 Example 2 A security guard has permission to disarm areas 3 4 and 5 After 15 minutes the areas rearm automatically The implications are e An alarm group exists defining areas 3 4 and 5 and is assigned to the security guard e This alarm group enables alarm group restriction 3 which has been configured to set areas 3 4 and 5 for timed disarm e The alarm group restriction disarmed time option in Timers programming see Alarm group restriction 1 to 7 disarmed time on page 172 is set to 15 minutes 198 Alliance Builder User Manual Functions Alarm group restrictions can be used for the followin
287. rm when the area is armed Programming Program the delayed disarmed alarm time in timers programming Disarmed flags disarmed alarm 24 hr zone flag camera flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 41 Entry exit emergency door Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed Automatically activates an audible warning on the RAS assigned to the same areas regardless of the event flag programming The only event flag activated is the zone flag If the zone reactivates it will generate a new local alarm after the programmed local alarm reminder time When the area is armed the exit timer starts and activating the zone will not generate an alarm If the area is armed and the zone is activated the entry timer will start When the entry time has expired an alarm will be generated The zone must be closed when arming the area Example Emergency door that is also used to enter the premises Programming Program the entry exit time in Area programming and enable the buzzers in RAS programming Program the local alarm reminder time in Timers programming Disarmed flags zone flag Armed flags siren armed alarm 24 hr zone flag 353 354 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 57 Zone types continued Number and name Description 42 Entry exit emergency Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed but does not report it door with code to the central station When the area is armed the exit
288. rmed alarm Same as event flag 2 12 Armed alarm Same as event flag 2 13 Internal siren Flag is raised when any internal siren activates in any area 14 N A Do not use 15 N A Do not use 16 Testing Flag is raised during the arm test The flag will remain active for 50 per cent of the testing event flag time option in timers programming 265 266 Alliance Builder User Manual Enabling certain options in zone programming will cause these flags to be raised Example Enabling the external siren option in Zone programming will cause the external siren event flag to be raised during an alarm condition Event flag description Defines event flag number 1 as external siren Area Allows the user to associate an event flag number with the external siren event flag option in Area programming In this case event flag number 1 is assigned Zone Supports an option that will sound the external siren if the zone goes into alarm When the zone does go into alarm the system will first determine if the siren event flag should be raised If the option is enabled the system will fetch the event flag from the assigned area and raise it Once that particular event flag is raised the system will then sound the alarm because there is an understanding within the system that the external siren will be activated whenever event flag number 1 is raised Custom event flags Custom event flags are typically used in options such as macro logic pr
289. rmitted time an alarm condition is registered If this value is set to zero an alarm is not generated by prolonged activation but is determined by the double knock interval Chapter 9 Access programming features This chapter provides an overview of access programming features In this chapter 178 Alliance Builder User Manual Areas An area defines a physical space within a building The primary purpose of the area is to establish intrusion protection facilitated through one or more zones and to tie those zones to RAS devices accomplished through alarm groups Each zone added to the system is assigned one or more areas The zones controlled by RAS devices for the purpose of arming disarming the area Zones are not directly armed rather their associated areas are For example when a user arms a specified area through a keypad the system will treat all zones assigned to that area as being in the armed state When an assigned zone enters the active state it will cause the system to generate an alarm Areas also define numerous event flags that may be used in performing other system functions For example you can assign specific event flags to be raised whenever the area is either armed or disarmed Areas also support several central station reporting options When an alarm is generated the system will use the Reporting options on page 181 in order to determine which central station to call Functions Areas can be us
290. rs Text words are downloaded to the control panel and are used to display words and phrases in LCD keypads reports and software management programs To find specific text words scroll through the list or enter the text word or a text word number in the appropriate search box and click Search To add user defined words to the library use the Control panel programming tab Chapter 4 101 Panel device tools Event flag descriptions tool Event flags are one of the most important aspects of the Alliance system Event flags are used by the system in order to signal an event When a certain event occurs event flags are raised to notify other programming options to perform specified functions Use this tool to view the event flags for your project The event flag descriptions are not downloaded to the control panel but are used to make programming the system easier It is very important to document event flag descriptions These descriptions help to eliminate mistakes and confusion when you need to make changes in the future There are two types of event flags predefined and custom Predefined event flags numbered from 1 to 16 can not be changed or removed see Predefined event flags on page 265 Custom event flags can be added edited or removed from the list by changing the programming in the Panel programming tab The list includes the following information Number Event flag number 1 to 255 Description A brief description th
291. rs when armed or disarmed The zone type will determine these circumstances and consequently whether or not a zone is active 240 Alliance Builder User Manual Reporting code Specify the alarm to be reported when the zone generates an alarm The reported event is taken from Reporting class programming see Reporting classes on page 221 The actual message that is reported to the central station depends on the selected protocol and the selected class and sub class The class holds the basic reporting range i e medical panic while the sub class is used to provide further differentiation for the event being reported Test option Purpose Specify the zone testing procedure during arm disarm test In order to enable zone testing the test mode option in Control panel options programming see Test mode on page 253 must be configured Table 29details the test types Table 29 Test types Test type Description No testing required The zone during the disarmed test is not testing during an arm disarm test The zone is disabled disarm test internal siren Test during disarm The zone is tested during a disarm test The zone is disabled during the test Tested in arm test and The zone is tested during both the arm disarm test disarmed Test during arm test The zone is tested during the arm test Set event flag 13 during The zone is tested during the disarm test and event flag 13 is raised This test
292. s the times a user assigned to a door group can access RAS devices on the system bus as well as intelligent doors found on the 4 Door Controller Alarm group Dictates the times a user assigned to an alarm group can control arm disarm specified areas Floor group Dictates the times a user assigned to a floor group can access programmed floors Relay Dictates the times a relay may be activated when mapped to an event flag Macro logic Because macros inherently use event flags as input time zones dictate the times when macros are functional Chapter 15 227 Time and date programming features Programming The following programming options are available for hard time zones Time zone number Range 1 to 24 Time zone 0 defaults to 24 hours Specify which hard time zone is being programmed Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Start time Specify the start time for the time zone in hours and minutes End time Specify the end time for the time zone in hours and minutes Days of the week Specify the days of the week the time zone will be active Include holidays If enabled the time zone will be valid for all days defined by the system holidays 228 Alliance Builder User Manual Holidays Holidays are used in conjunction with time zones in order to define additional access parameters Under ma
293. s zone Bypass a zone 11 Unbypass zone Unbypass any zone previously bypassed 12 Test zone Test a specific zone 13 Start automatic disarm test Perform an automatic disarm test 14 Program users Modify user database 15 Time and date Modify system time and date 16 Bypass unbypass RAS DGP Bypass unbypass any RAS DGP device 17 Enable disable service tech Enable disable the service technician s code 18 Reset cameras Reset the film frame count on a camera to zero This is done when you have changed the film in a camera 19 Installer programming Access installer programming databases 20 Door and floor groups Modify door and floor group databases 21 Holidays Modify holiday database 22 Open door Open a door for the programmed unlock time 23 Unlock lock disable enable Door can be unlocked until locked again with this menu Disable or enable doors 24 Print history Force the system to output events to a printer Chapter 10 197 Alarm control programming features Alarm group restrictions Alarm group restrictions impose limits on the Timed disarmed areas and Areas to arm reset functions for selected areas within an alarm group Each alarm group is limited to only one restriction In order to support alarm group restrictions the following criteria must be met e The corresponding restriction must be enabled within the alarm group itself e The areas defined within the restriction are also defined within the ala
294. sarm programming the Alarm group restriction disarm time is the delayed arming time Disarm test time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the time available to do a disarm test Arm test time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the time available to do an arm test Chapter 8 173 Control panel programming features Warning time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the duration of the warning time When alarm group restrictions are used and areas are programmed for timed disarm a warning will sound if a warning time is programmed indicating the areas are about to arm Delayed disarmed alarm time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the delay time before an alarm from a delayed disarmed alarm is reported to the central station The delay time is overridden if another delayed zone has already been activated Suspicion time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the length of time that a camera continues to operate after a suspicion zone has switched to normal state Service time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the amount of time a technician who has been given service technician privileges has to service the system Local alarm reminder time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the time that can elapse between acknowledging a local alarm and an alarm reoccurring including the audible alert Individual zone test time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the maximum time required to perform a test on an individual zone 174
295. scription of a property when it is selected and the value box indicates what is currently programmed You can also mouse over a property to view a brief description The following two lists of properties are provided Alliance Builder properties Alliance Builder properties are not downloaded to the control panel These properties are defined by Alliance Builder and include the part number and the type of enclosure required This information drives the required Alliance parts list see Parts list tab on page 67 Most Alliance Builder properties are read only grayed out and can not be changed 50 Alliance Builder User Manual Device properties Device properties are downloaded to the control panel These properties are set to defaults by Alliance Builder but can be programmed as required for your application In many cases this will be a combined list of categories in order to provide access to all relevant properties for a given device DIP switch tabs The two tabs at the bottom of the device properties list provide graphical representations of the physical DIP switch settings required by some Alliance devices If a device is selected that does not require DIP switch settings the graphics will be disabled Figure 17 Figure 17 DIP switch tabs Device Address DIP Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 Off Address DIP Programming DIP Address DIP tab Some Alliance devices have address DIP switches that need to be set on the devic
296. select a project on the list or create a new project see Project list tab on page 36 After you select or create a project the System bus layout tab will open and populate with the information for the selected project and the Project list tab will be hidden The System bus layout tab is a multilevel tab From the System bus layout you can invoke the Local bus layout tab or the Control panel programming tab see System bus layout tab on page 44 Alliance Builder User Manual Left pane interface The information available through the left pane interface Figure 6 is determined by the active view tab Figure 6 Left pane e System Devices ELO System Bus Devices d Data Gathering Panels B D DGP Zone Expanders E aL 31205 E aL3210 y av 1220 CH Point ID DGP AL 1291 240 Wireless DGP d AL 1231 DICH RAS EE Keypads E am E am si OP Ancillary Devices ELO Ancillary Devices aj EA Zone Expanders WB aL 1206 5 Relay Expanders CEBI E altera Ei CH Databus BB aL2740 e RETO M Ancillary Card Size Code main uineas The tabs to the left of the interface access the following information Control panels A tree of the control panels currently in the project See Control panel tab on page 46 Device tree A tree of available devices will change when you activate a view tab Properties A tree of the device properties will change when you activate a view tab Return view
297. ssed zones will be listed and the user prompted with the option to arm the system Disabled The RAS device will not indicate bypassed zones Display user flags Enabled Special user flags are displayed when programming users The special user flags include two card function guard visitor trace user card only privileged and extended access Disabled The special user flags are not displayed Delayed disarmed alarm lockout Enabled An alarm can only be cancelled if the zone is in a normal state Delayed disarmed alarms are locked out until the alarm device is reset and the zone has switched to a normal state This only applies to latching delayed disarmed alarms Disabled Normal operation Delayed disarmed alarms are not locked out Chapter 15 261 Miscellaneous programming features Zone expansion fitted Enabled Indicates that an 8 zone expander is attached to the control panel Disabled Indicates that an 8 zone expander is not attached to the control panel Bypass zone tamper Enabled When a zone is bypassed the tamper is also bypassed No tamper alarm will occur Disabled Tamper alarms will occur normally Report multiple alarms Enabled Reports multiple alarms as a separate alarm for each alarm that occurs Disabled Only the first alarm will be reported Any following alarms that occur will not be reported Report multiple restores Enabled Reports a restore for every
298. sses Reporting classes let you specify what is reported in the event of an alarm When a zone triggers an alarm the assigned reporting class is reported to the configured central stations Programming The following programming options are available for reporting classes Reporting class Range 1 to 8 Select the reporting class that you would like to program Table 24details the reporting classes Table 24 Reporting classes Reporting class Name 1 Medical 2 Emergency alarms 3 Panic alarms 4 Burglar alarms 5 General alarms 6 24 Hour alarm 7 Emergency supervisory 8 System alarms Reporting condition Range to 6 222 Alliance Builder User Manual Select the condition to program Every class can report 6 conditions detailed in Table 25 Table 25 Reporting conditions Reporting condition Name 1 Alarms 2 Alarms restore 3 Tamper 4 Tamper restore 5 Bypass 6 Bypass restore unbypass Report to central station Range 1 to 4 Specify the central stations this reporting class will report to when the designated reporting condition is triggered Enable audio listen in Enable audio listen in for the reporting class condition specified Chapter 12 223 Reporting programming features Voice reporting Voice reporting works in conjunction with a voice communications module to send voice reports to a specified phone number Programming
299. ssions include To delete a project select the project on the list and click Delete selected projects To reassign projects select the project from the list and click Reassign selected projects It is important to always reassign projects before removing the installers assigned to the projects The project list on the Project management tab is a reflection of the project list on the Project list tab and is provided in this tool to make programming user information faster and easier Chapter 3 89 Alliance Builder tools Device property window tool The Device property window tool invokes the property window This window enables you to program the selected property while easily accessing related information in other areas of Alliance Builder This can save you a lot of time when you are programming two related features and need to be able to see and program them at the same time If you have the property window open in a programming area and you change related properties in the main interface the information in the property window will not show the changes When you click on the property window it will show the updated information When you have finished programming the item click Close to exit the tool All programming done in the property window will be saved and reflected in your project See Property programming on page 18 for details on various methods of changing property programming 90 Alliance Builder User Manual Export tool
300. st a number You can set how many credits equal one token For example at a library photocopier each time a letter sized copy is made with the card one token worth ten cents is deducted While for legal size copies two tokens are deducted Reader credit account number Credit account number to subtract the used token values from one of four available See also credit units Reader location number Select a reader location number from 1 to 4 The location number may represent an area floor group of floors building or group of buildings Output time factor The output time factor is used to modify the pulse width output of the credit output pulsed option The output time factor is in a range from 1 to 256 The pulse for the Credit output pulsed is the output time factor multiplied by 0 01 seconds This gives a pulse width in the range from 0 01 to 2 56 seconds The activation time for the Credit output timed option is the output time factor multiplied by the token value of the reader This gives a time in the range of 1 second to 193 days 301 302 Alliance Builder User Manual System codes A system code sometimes referred to as a facility or site code is a numeric value stored in the control panel and on access cards The Alliance system has two system codes A and B This allows the use of cards with different system codes Offset The offset is a numeric field that is stored in the system and is used to link to the card
301. st of current projects that includes the project name the date it was last updated the date it was created and the installer Figure 12 Project list tab E Project List Existing Project List Select an existing Project by clicking the Project Name from the list or create a new Project by clicking one of the buttons below Job number Project name Project description Created da E 1 Alliance Project 8 New Alliance Project 7 25 2005 lt At gt Create New Project o Create From Template Import APF Archive The project list displayed is dependent on your installer type see Installer types tab on page 87 and only contains the projects you have opened created or modified If you want to access a project that is not on the list use the Menu bar and select File Open Project to access a list of all projects Open projects To open a project select the project name in the project list Alliance Builder will open the project in the System bus layout tab Chapter 2 37 View tabs Remove projects When you remove a project from the project list you will destroy all database entries and panel definitions for that project All references to the project will be removed from Alliance Builder If you want to retain files you need to archive the files you want to keep before you remove a project To remove a project do the following 1 Right click the project name on the list and select De
302. t of time specified in soak test days 258 Alliance Builder User Manual System options Dual zone Enabled Dual zone operation is activated For dual zone to operate every zone needs two 4k7 resistors enabling the panel to detect whether a zone is in a normal state active or tampered This is a global setting and affects all zones Disabled Dual zone operation is disabled Automatic unbypass when area disarmed Enabled Zones in a normal bypassed state are unbypassed when any of the areas assigned to the zone are disarmed This ensures that bypassed zones are not ignored or overlooked during disarm This option is only valid if the alarm group is programmed for the automatic unbypass option in Alarm groups programming Disabled Zones are not unbypassed when areas assigned to the zone are disarmed Display one zone at a time Enabled One zone at a time is displayed on the LCD keypad even though there may be more than one in the list of zones to be displayed The user must scroll through the zones to view them all Disabled Zones are displayed as a list of numbers and it is necessary to select the zone number to display the individual zone name User name file Enabled Prompts for the user name when programming user codes using the LCD keypad Disabled Will not prompt for the user name when programming user codes using the LCD keypad System alarms set siren and strobe Enabled The dedicated tampe
303. tab on page 44 and change the information programmed there Use the As built tool on page 81 to get a printed document of battery calculations for each power source device in your project This document will show the details for the power source device all devices drawing power from that power source and the calculations made to generate the final battery requirement value If a power source device does not have any devices drawing power from it the device will not have a document page in the As built report Chapter 2 77 View tabs Cable calculation tab Use the Cable calculation tab to produce the cable length requirements for selected cable types The calculation results are used in the As built report Use the Graph setup and Wire setup tabs to set the parameters for the calculation Graph setup tab Use the Graph setup tab to set the X and Y axis range for the graph To return to the default settings click Reset Wire setup tab Use the Wire setup tab to set the following parameters e Power supply volts e Minimum voltage e Wire DC resistance ohms km e Added wires to reduce resistance Number of power supply wires Calculate cable length To calculate cable length do the following 1 Set the graph parameters in the Graph setup tab 2 Setthe wire parameters in the Wire setup tab 3 Select the wire type in the Selected wiring field 4 Click Update graph Print cable calculation To print the results of t
304. te a new project or open an existing project Your view of Alliance Builder will reflect the limitations of the products you select For example if you select a control panel that does not support 4 door controller DGP devices when you open the project in Alliance Builder the programming features for 4 door controllers will not be available The status bar will have the door totals cancelled out and the 4 door controller DGP devices will not appear on the System device tree in the System layout tab To ensure you have all the programming features required by your system be careful to select the appropriate control panel and software management program Control panel limitations The Alliance control panels provide the features shown in Table 1 Table 1 Control panel features Chapter 1 Introduction Feature AL 4X17 AL 3017 AL 2017 Areas 16 8 4 Maximum number of zones 256 64 32 umber of 8 zone expanders supported directly 2 2 2 on control panel Maximum number of relays 255 255 255 Maximum number of doors 48 48 0 Maximum number of DGPs 15 15 15 Maximum number of system bus RAS devices 16 16 16 Default number of alarm groups 32 32 32 Default number of door groups 10 10 10 Default number of floor groups 10 10 0 Expandable memory support Yes Yes No Clock relay controllers support Yes Yes Yes Number of card holders 50 50 50 Number of users with names 50 50 50 Number of users with
305. ted zone event per sub class and condition 334 Alliance Builder User Manual Zone event reporting Table 56 shows the reported zone event per sub class and condition The CID column holds the reported Contact ID event the SIA column holds the SIA event Zone event type numbers 1 to 12 and 43 to 49 are not in the table and should not be used Table 56 Zone event reporting Type number Class Sub class Condition ele SIA 13 Panic Panic 120 PA Alarm E120 PA Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 PB Alarm restore R120 PR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 PU 14 Panic Panic 121 HA Alarm E121 HA duress Tamper E83 TA Bypass E570 HB Alarm restore R121 HR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 HU 15 Panic Panic 122 PA Alarm E122 PA silent panic Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 PB Alarm restore R122 PR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 PU Table 56 Zone event reporting continued Appendix E Zone event reporting Type number Class Sub class Condition cID SIA 16 Panic Panic 123 PA Alarm E123 PA audible panic Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 PB Alarm restore R123 PR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 PU 17 Burglar Burglar 130 BA Alarm E130 BA burglary Tamper E383 TA Bypass E570 BB Alarm restore R130 BR Tamper restore R383 TR Bypass restore R570 BU 18 Burglar Bu
306. tem event flags will latch if the latching system alarms option is enabled in System options programming Do not assign any of the 16 predefined event flags to any of the system event flags and ensure that the event flags assigned are not used in other programming options areas zones etc Functions System event flags can be used for the following functions System level monitoring Associate custom event flags with system events Indicators Provide a visual indication when specified events take place For example use an LED to indicate that the computer connection is OK RAS keypad buzzer Cause RAS devices to sound their warning buzzer Programming Chapter 15 Miscellaneous programming features Table 35 shows the programming options available for system event flags Table 35 System event flag programming options Event flag Description AC fail Flag is raised when an AC failure condition exists on the control panel or any DGP Low battery Flag is raised when a low battery condition exists on the control panel or any DGP Fuse fail Flag is raised when a fuse fail condition exists on the control panel or any DGP Tamper Flag is raised when a tamper condition exists on the control panel or any DGP Siren fail Flag is raised when a siren failure condition exists on the control panel or any DGP DGP bypassed Flag is raised when a DGP has been isolated via the bypass unbypass command
307. terminal on the RAS device Refer to Table 6 Door RAS numbering on page 123 for more information on how to identify RAS devices on the controller Toggle RAS Enable disable local bus RAS toggle mode only supported by keypad devices Enabled A single key will toggle arming disarming Disabled Two distinct keys will arm disarm 126 Alliance Builder User Manual Table 7 shows the keypad input and toggle modes Table 7 Keypad inputs and toggle modes Keypad input Toggle mode PIN ENTER or Enabled Toggles the arm disarm state Disabled Arms PIN MENU or Enabled Toggles the arm disarm state Disabled Disarms Card to PIN time If a user is required to enter a PIN and badge a card in order to gain access this is the maximum time allowed between the two actions If the time elapses the user must repeat the process Two card time If two users are required to enter a PIN or badge a card in order to gain access this is the maximum time allowed between the first user entering a PIN or badging a card and the second user entering a PIN or badging a card If the time elapses the users must repeat the process Multiple badge time If a door has been programmed to support the 3x badge option in RAS programming see RAS options on page 116 this is the maximum time allowed between the first badge and the third badge If the time elapses the user must repeat the process Region count limit Set a val
308. text to change it There is a character length limit that you will not be able to exceed 22 Alliance Builder User Manual Device right click menus You can right click devices on device trees and layout graphics to access drop down menus Right click a device on a device tree to get the drop down menu shown in Figure 10 Figure 10 Right click menu System Bus Devices gt 2 Data Gathering Panels DGP Zone Expanders E AL 1205 E GI What s This l View installation manual 20 Door E View product datasheet E As IE AL 1265 E AL 1256 Point ID DGP I AL 1291 Wireless DGP 9i v gt Right click any device on the system layout graphic to access a variety of menu options The options available for each device depend on the type of device and how the device is programmed Options include Remove all devices from the control panel This option is only available for control panels It allows you to remove all devices from the control panel Remove device This option is not available for control panels It allows you to remove the DGP or RAS device its enclosure and all devices connected to the DGP or RAS Click to view enclosure summary Provides a read only list of all devices components found within this enclosure Click to view a summary for this control panel This option is only available for control panels It provides a brief describing and a read only list of the control panel s capacities
309. the Alliance control panels Table 14 Control panel features Chapter 8 Control panel programming features Feature AL 4X17 AL 3017 AL 2017 Areas 16 16 16 Maximum number of zones 256 64 32 umber of 8 zone expanders supported directly on 2 2 2 control panel Maximum number of relays 255 255 255 Maximum number of doors 48 48 0 Maximum number of DGPs 15 15 15 Maximum number of system bus RAS devices 16 16 16 Default number of alarm groups 32 32 32 Default number of door groups 10 10 10 Default number of floor groups 10 10 0 Expandable memory support Yes Yes No Clock relay controllers support Yes Yes Yes Number of card holders 50 50 50 Number of users with names 50 50 50 Number of users with PIN 50 50 50 Access logged events 10 10 10 Alarm logged events 250 250 250 Onboard zones 16 8 8 Onboard relays physical and virtual 5 5 5 161 162 Alliance Builder User Manual Memory expansion The ability to support a larger number of resources is dictated by the attached memory module Table 15 shows the available memory modules and their respective limits Table 15 Memory modules 1 MB non Memory related resource IUM 4 MB IUM 8 MB IUM Door groups 128 128 128 Alarm groups 138 138 138 Floor groups 128 128 128 Logged alarm events 1000 1000 1000 Logged access events 1000 1000 1000 Card holder users 11466 17873 65535 Users
310. the control panel to accept two sets of cards with different system codes Offset A and B Range 32767 to 32767 Specify the number to be added or subtracted from the actual user card ID number The control panel will calculate the user number using the following calculation User Number CARD ID or card offset The calculated user number is used for programming the user and when reporting events to the central station or the computer Offset A and B is used in conjunction with the respective system code System code A is mapped to Offset A and System code B is mapped to Offset B Soak test days Range 1 to 255 days Specify the number of days for the soak test period The soak test period is started when enable soak test is set in Zone programming If soak test days is left blank the soak test period is infinite and must be disabled by the user The soak test can be used to diagnose problems without causing false alarms When a zone is set to soak test it does not e Report to central station e Activate siren e Activate strobe e Activate any outputs relays The change of the zone state is logged in the history file with events soak alarm and soak alarm restore If the zone does not go into alarm during the soak test period the enable soak test option for that zone will be reset when the soak test period has elapsed If the zone goes into alarm during the soak test period the soak test period is extended by the amoun
311. tive media to Supplier during the LICENSED PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT TED TO IMPLIED LAR PURPOSE AND EXCEPT AS E ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY A OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT IS FO NG R ANY HARDWARE FURNISHED HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSS to You by GE the United S ransfer any of void This Agreement shall be governed by and interpreted under the United States of America without regard to conf exclusive jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in Multnomah County Oregon resolve any disputes arising under or in connection wi BOVE CIDENT F SUCH RMING SOFTWARE AND OR DEFECTIVE MEDIA N NO EVENT WILL GE SECURITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY AL OR INDIRECT NOR FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OUT OF USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE WITH THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF GE SECURITY DAMAGES NOR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD SECURITY shall not be exported or reexported in ates or any other applicable jurisdiction Any he rights duties or obligations hereunder shall be aws of the State of New York law provisions You hereby consent to the icts o o h this Agreement with venue in Portland Restricted rights legend The Licensed Product is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS In the event the United States Government or an agency thereof is granted a license the following additional terms apply Restricted Computer Software as defined in the Commercial Computer Software Rest
312. to 255 seconds Specify the period of time prior to the shunt timer expiring that the shunt warning event flag should be raised Relay number Range 0 to 255 Specify the relay to start the shunt timer If the relay is always active the zone will always be shunted As soon as the relay deactivates the shunt timer will begin When a relay is used the total shunt time is the time the relay remains in the active state plus the shunt time 248 Alliance Builder User Manual Shunt event number Range 0 to 255 Specify the event flag that is raised during the shunt time period Shunt time Range 0 to 254 refer to table Specify the period of time in which the zone will be shunted While the timer is running a zone in the active state will not generate an alarm Table 30 shows the shunt time ranges Table 30 Shunt time ranges Shunt time range Description 1 127 Time period in seconds 128 number of minutes Time period in minutes Under this condition add 128 to the total of the number of minutes When programming one to two minute periods set the time in seconds Do not use a time of 0 seconds for doors if cancel door event is disabled This could cause the zone to be shunted indefinitely Shunt warning event number Range 0 to 255 Specify the event flag that is raised when the shunt warning timer is active Zone shunt options Chapter 14 249 Zone and relay programming features
313. tool for activating event flags when specific events occur These events provide inputs to logic equations When the result of the equation is true the macro event tied to the equation will follow Up to four event flag inputs may be included in the logic equation Each macro input in the logic equation can be programmed as an AND or an OR function and may be inverted Options are provided so that the macro s result will trigger a macro output which may be a pulse timed on delay off delay or latched when activated The event flags used here are pre defined event flag numbers as listed in the macro event flags Some can only be used for macro inputs some for macro outputs and some may be used for both Before programming a macro it is important to understand the basics of Boolean logic For information on Boolean logic see Boolean logic on page 278 Alliance system macros Both control panels and 4 door elevator controllers have programmable macros The following are basic elements of a macro with their attributes Macro Number and description Four inputs Event flag number or relay number Logical equation AND NAND or OR NOR Timing Pulse delay ON delay OFF or latched Output Event flat number or zone number Macro logic number Range Control panel 1 to 24 4 door elevator controller 1 to 48 Identifies the macro or program number Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferr
314. uation can be combined with any output function except for the latched output function Logical symbol input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 output Logical equation Input Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Output 284 Alliance Builder User Manual Example 2 2 input AND gate 2 input OR gate combined Table 41 Example 2 Input OR AND Result 1 OR If input Lactivates the output will be triggered 2 AND If inputs 2 and 3 activate the output sill be triggered 3 AND 4 OR If input 4 activates the output will be triggered The inputs are activated by an output relay activating or an event flag activating All inputs may be optionally individually inverted the NOT function Any unused inputs should be set to OR The logical equation can be combined with any output function except for the latched output function Logical symbol input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 output Logical equation Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Output Appendix A Boolean logic Example 3 2 input AND gate 2 input OR gate combined Table 42 Example 5 Input OR AND Result 1 OR If either input 1 or input 2 activates the output will be triggered OR 2 OR 3 AND Inputs 3 and 4 have to activate simultaneously to tripper the output 4 AND The inputs are activated by an output relay activating or an event flag activating All inputs may be optionally individually inverted the NOT function A
315. ue which when reached will cause the region count limit flag to be raised This event flag can then be used in door macro logic programming Chapter 6 127 DGP programming features Elevator programming options The following options are only used by the 4 elevator controller and do not apply to the 4 door controller Starting floor number Specify the starting floor this 4 elevator controller will control Last floor number Specify the last floor this 4 elevator controller will control Starting relay number Specify the starting physical relay number this 4 elevator controller will use to arm disarm floors Zones monitor floor selected Specify how zones are used to monitor floors Enabled Zones are used to monitor the selected floor and a report is sent to the printer and management software Disabled Zones are used for alarm monitoring Wait for floor selection Specify how the elevator will wait for floor selection Enabled The elevator will wait for only one floor to be selected before going on Disabled When the user is allowed access to multiple floors multiple floor may be selected Starting zone number Specify the starting zone number this 4 elevator controller will use to monitor floors 128 Alliance Builder User Manual Elevator override group Specify a floor group number programmed with floors and a time zone The elevator override group determines the floors that may be freely accessed in th
316. ully armed Each of the following criteria must be true in order for the system to raise the flag All areas with inputs assigned are armed Noalarm conditions no inputs isolated Noentru exit timers are running Computer connection active Flag is raised when the connection between the control panel and the management software is active Line fault Flag is raised during line fault conditions The control panel will constantly monitor the line determined by Central station communications programming to determine if the line is in fault Battery test Flag is raised during battery test Engineer walk test running Flag is raised during an engineer walk test Engineer walk test reset After each walk test a new engineer walk test reset system event flag will be activated for 5 seconds Chapter 15 Miscellaneous programming features Text words Text words provide the functionality to display descriptive names for system resources such as zones and alarm groups on the LCD keypad By default the system provides up to 900 predefined default text words in the text word library see Text word library on page 308 You can also add up to 100 user defined text words to customize the library to your specific needs Not all system resources use text words For instance although DGP programming supports a description property this is not treated as a text word nor is it downloaded to the panel Therefore the
317. umber programmed in the card is the user number unless your system uses a card offset or intelligent user modules User numbers above 50 will only be accepted if a 1 MB 4 MB or 8 MB user memory module is used User numbers above 11 466 will only accepted if a 4 MB or 8 MB user memory module is used User name The user name is a text name with up to 40 characters up to 20 characters for the first name and up to 20 characters for the last name Only the first 200 names 50 if the system does not have memory expansion and only the first 16 characters of each name will be downloaded Department A department indicates the area that a user works in Department details are entered in Admin Department Department details are only available for registered photo ID users User type User types define the type of users for enhanced security and are only available in combination with a 4 door elevator controller User types include e Normal Normal operation Two cards Requires two valid user codes cards to be presented to do any alarm or access control functions Appendix B Card access e Guard The user s code card can only do functions when used in conjunction with a visitor s code card PIN card number The PIN card number holds the personal identification number for the user Confirm PIN card number The PIN card number is hidden To check that typing errors have not occurred the number has to be typed in again in the Confirm P
318. up assigned to a RAS device determines which areas can be armed and disarmed by the device 114 Alliance Builder User Manual Door event flag Range 0 to 255 The door event flag is raised when the RAS device grants access to a user This event flag is typically used by a number of other programming features within the system such as macro programming The unlock time option in Timers programming see RAS unlock time on page 174 determines how long the door will remain open Menu alarm group Range 1 to 138 The menu alarm group assigned to a RAS device determines which features can be accessed via the keypad such as the installation menu system status history and device control In order for a user to access certain menu options the user must have the same menu permissions enabled through the alarm group assigned to the user as the RAS device Chapter 5 115 RAS programming features Relay output control group Range 0 to 32 Purpose Specify the relay control group connected to the RAS device When a relay control group is assigned to a RAS device the open collector relay OUT terminal follows the first relay of the relay control group See Numbering on page 324 Table 5 shows relay groups and their related relay numbers Table 5 Relay numbering Relay number Relay number 1 1 17 129 2 9 18 137 3 17 19 145 4 25 20 153 5
319. uration window right click the Total point ID devices folder on the tree Select Add new point ID device 4 Inthe Point ID selection window use the arrow button to access a drop down list of devices and select a device from the list 5 The Selected attributes field shows a description category and zone relay number for the selected device Click OK to add the device Program point ID device properties You can also use the Point ID configuration window to program properties for devices you have added to the tree To program devices click on the device in the tree to select it Alliance Builder supplies most of the information shown on the General tab You can however change the default value in the Point ID address field by clicking the 3 dot button and selecting an available address from the list provided You can also type in a description for the device in the Description box If the device selected is a I O device two additional tabs are provided for programming zone and relay options The Zones tab provides a drop down menu to select one of the following for each zone Undefined This is the default Double EOL Double EOL end of line is a two resistor configuration Single EOL Single EOL end of line is a one resistor configuration Zone is off This indicates the zone not used The Relay tab provides a drop down menu to select one of the following for each relay Undefined This is the default Temporal Siren output R
320. uts operands The value of the result is either true or false If true the macro will be performed Operators Operators perform logical operations on the inputs operands These operands can be considered logic gates with multiple inputs and a single output Each operator can be called a gate such as OR gate or AND gate When defining a macro within the Alliance system it is beneficial to understand the symbols of a gate and how it is wired into the logic Logical OR operator The OR operator performs a logical OR on the inputs and can be summarized as any 1 in results in a 1 out or any true input will result in a true result If A or B are active then the result X is active In Table 37 for the OR gate symbol the notation for an OR operation is as in A B and is said A OR B AORB X Table 37 OR gate Input A Input B Output X False False False True False True False True True True True True Appendix A 279 Boolean logic Logical AND operator The AND operator performs a logical AND operation on the input and can be summarized as an O results in a O out In Table 38 for the AND gate symbol the notation for an AND operation is as in A B and is said A AND B AANDB X Table 38 AND gate Input A Input B Output X False False False True False False False True False True True True 280 Alliance Builder User Manual Logical NOT operator A NOT can be appli
321. vailable for doors Door number Range 17 to 64 Specify which door is being programmed The door number is based on the 4 door controller DGP address as well as the logical door number For example a 4 door controller with an address of 1 would yield doors 17 to 20 where door 17 maps to Door 1 door 18 maps to Door 2 etc Description Specify a 40 character text description The description is not transferred to the device and is only used by the management software Unlock time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the amount of time the door unlocks when a user is granted access This value is the total number of seconds the unlock relay will remain active Extended access time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the amount of time the door unlocks when a user with extended access is granted access This value is the total number of seconds the unlock relay will remain active This option is useful when additional time should be granted to special users to meet ADA requirements Door shunt option Specify one of several different door shunting options Door shunting is the ability to bypass an open door that might ordinarily generate an alarm The door will remain shunted for the period of time defined in the shunt time option Door shunt options include 142 Alliance Builder User Manual No shunting The door is not shunted Zone shunting The door is shunted for the specified shunt time If the door is left open longer t
322. valid card and PIN is required in order to open the door IN OUT region Range 0 to 254 Establish a region for either the IN or OUT reader where the number corresponds to a previously configured region The region defines a boundary for the assigned reader When a user is granted access to a door configured with a region the region number is recorded against the user code therefore when regions are employed with certain antipassback settings the user could be denied access at the same reader twice As soon as the user passes through the OUT region the user is cleared from that region If hard antipassback were enabled the user would then be able to re enter the region Note Region O acts as Off Premises while region 255 is used for Region Disabled Passback Define region behavior for the IN and OUT readers Depending on the setting the system will either grant or deny a user access to the same region twice in succession To clear a hard antipassback violation the user must pass through another keypad reader in order to change the region number that has been recorded against the user number or the card must be reprogrammed in the User menu The region record is reset when the user is downloaded into the 4 door controller The door must be opened after the reader is used before antipassback will take effect The door contacts must be wired to the 4 door controller Regions must be programmed for the IN OUT regions in order for this
323. will be a delay of the specified time before the burglar alarm BA or BA class tamper alarm TA will be reported to the central station All other alarms are reported immediately without delay A to B alarm delay time Range 0 to 255 minutes Specify the delay time that the system waits for a second alarm If the second alarm happens within the delay time it will be reported as a verified alarm Screensaver timeout time Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the amount of time it takes for the RAS device screensaver to time out The screensaver timer will be reset with the programmed period every time you press a RAS key when the screensaver is not active To manually activate the screensaver press the CLEAR key at the Enter Code prompt RAS card and PIN timeout Range 0 to 255 seconds Specify the delay time between badging the card and entering the PIN Double knock interval Range 0 to 255 minutes If enabled for a particular zone the double knock interval specifies the maximum permitted time between a zone becoming active for the first time and becoming active for a second time If the time a zone remains active exceeds the permitted time an alarm condition is registered 176 Alliance Builder User Manual Double knock duration Range 0 to 255 seconds If enabled for a particular zone the double knock duration specifies the maximum permitted time a zone may remain active If the time a zone remains active exceeds the pe
324. with names 200 200 200 Users with PIN 1000 1000 1000 Note Memor expansion must be paired between control panels and 4 door controllers For example adding a 4 MB IUM on the control panel requires adding the same memory tupe for all 4 door controllers IUM not only increases the number of resources but also expands the card data from 26 bits to 48 bits When upgrading a control panel with an IUM first do a full upload of the control panel to the management software in order to back up the system Next install the IUMs on both the control panel and all 4 door elevator controllers they must be paired Reset the control panel by using the Kill Jumper Go back to the saved system and select the appropriate IUM and download the system back to the control panel Chapter 8 Control panel programming features Multiple panel systems A multiple panel system is defined as an Alliance system containing more than one control panel If a significant number of resources such as doors and zones are required the panels may be networked Although a maximum of sixteen control panels may be networked within a single system the maximum recommended number due to real world performance is seven The ability to network multiple control panels within a single system is facilitated by RS485 to RS232 interface converter ancillary boards Communications Communications between the outside world and the control panel occur over the RS232 o
325. y an alarm Keypad buzzer Enabled When the zone is in alarm the RAS device buzzers are activated The system will determine which RAS devices should be buzzed based on the assigned areas defined for the zone The system will then go through each RAS device determining the assigned areas through the programmed alarm group Any RAS device whose area list matches the zone area will be buzzed Disabled The RAS device buzzers are not activated during an alarm Make all events 24 hour Enabled All armed disarmed event flags are raised when the zone is in alarm regardless of area status Disabled The armed disarmed event flags are raised strictly based on the status of the assigned areas Trigger armed alarm event flag 2 3 4 5 9 11 Enabled Event flag 2 is raised when the zone is in alarm and the area is armed Disabled Event flag 2 is not raised when the zone is in alarm Trigger disarmed alarm event flag 6 7 15 Enabled Event flag 6 is raised when the zone is in alarm and the area is disarmed Disabled Event flag 6 is not raised when the zone is in alarm Trigger event flag 8 24 hour Enabled Event flag 8 is raised when the zone is in alarm regardless of the area status Disabled Event flag 8 is not raised when the zone is in alarm Internal siren event flag Enabled The internal siren event flag is raised when the zone is in alarm Disabled The internal siren event flag is not rais
326. y control group without removing the associated RAS device For information on relay control group programming see RAS remote arming stations on page 112 Doors viewer This tab shows the number and description of all doors programmed to be supported by the control panel This includes up to 16 RAS devices on the system bus as well as up to 48 intelligent doors on 4 door controller local buses Number Door number which is either a RAS address or just a Door number Description Door description used for programming purposes not downloaded to the control panel Type The type is a combination of e Device type card reader or keypad e Door type RAS or intelligent door To find a particular door on the list type in the door name or number in the appropriate search box and click Search The status bar at the bottom of the viewer indicates the minimum maximum and number of doors used 98 Alliance Builder User Manual The properties shown in the viewer are programmed in the Local bus layout tab For information on all door programming options see Doors on page 138 Alarm groups viewer This tab shows the following basic alarm group properties programmed for the project Number Alarm group number Name Descriptive alarm group name that will be transferred to the control panel and the RAS device Description Alarm group description Areas Areas where the alarm group will have alarm control Time zone The tim
327. ystem bus layout tab see System bus layout tab on page 44 will open and populate the layout graphic with your new project components Add any additional Alliance hardware you require to the system by dragging and dropping devices onto the layout from the device tree Basic programming sequence After you have created a basic system using the project builder wizard or a template we recommend you do the following steps to complete your project 1 Program the control panel s Alliance Builder properties See Control panel on page 160 and System bus layout tab on page 44 Add any additional RAS devices needed to the system layout and program the devices Alliance Builder properties The as built description option is especially useful in larger systems to identify the device location in the project and ensure the devices are located at the proper entrances and exits See RAS remote arming stations on page 112 Program the DGP devices Alliance Builder properties See DGP data gathering panels on page 120 Select the control panel and enter control panel programming in system properties memory format and IUM format See Control panel on page 160 Program the PC programming see Control panel programming tab on page 62 Setup the areas needed for the project see Areas on page 178 and Control panel programming tab on page 62 Program the central station configuration and communication options see Central Station on page 214 and C

User Manual - Interlogix

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents